Ford 2015 Expedition Owners Manual

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-2015-Ford-Expedition-Owners-Manual-815528 ford-2015-ford-expedition-owners-manual-815528 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 564 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2015 EXPEDITION Owner’s Manual
2015 EXPEDITION Owner’s Manual
ford.cafordowner.com
July 2014
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Expedition
Litho in U.S.A.
FL1J 19A321 AA
Introduction 9
Child Safety 17
Installing child seats ....................................19
Booster seats .........................................29
Child seat positioning ...................................32
Child safety locks ......................................34
Safety Belts 35
Fastening the safety belts ................................37
Safety belt height adjustment .............................40
Safetybeltwarninglightandindicatorchime..................41
Safety belt-minder .....................................42
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance ...................43
Supplementary Restraints System 44
Driver and passenger airbags .............................47
Side airbags ..........................................48
Safety canopy curtain airbags .............................50
Crash sensors and airbag indicator .........................52
Airbag disposal........................................53
Keys and Remote Control 54
General information on radio frequencies.....................54
Remote control .......................................55
Keys ...............................................55
Replacing a lost key or remote control.......................61
MyKey 62
Settings, MyKey .......................................62
Creating.............................................63
Clearing.............................................64
System status.........................................64
Remote start, MyKey ...................................65
Troubleshooting, MyKey .................................67
Table of Contents 1
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Locks 69
Locking and unlocking ..................................69
SecuriCode™ keyless entry keypad .........................77
Security 79
SecuriLock® passive anti-theft system.......................79
Anti-theft alarm .......................................82
Steering Wheel 83
Adjusting the steering wheel ..............................83
Steering wheel controls .................................85
Pedals 89
Adjustable pedals ......................................89
Wipers and Washers 90
Windshield wipers .....................................90
Rain-sensing wipers ....................................90
Windshield washers ....................................91
Rear-window wiper and washer ............................91
Lighting 92
Lighting control .......................................92
Autolamps ...........................................93
Instrument lighting dimmer...............................94
Daytime running lamps ..................................94
Front fog lamps.......................................94
Directionindicators ....................................95
Interior lamps ........................................95
Windows and Mirrors 97
Power windows .......................................97
Exteriormirrors.......................................98
Interiormirrors ......................................100
Sunvisors ..........................................102
Moonroof ...........................................102
2Table of Contents
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster 104
Gauges.............................................104
Warning lamps and indicators ............................107
Audible warnings and indicators ..........................111
Information Displays 112
Message center.......................................112
Information messages ..................................125
Climate Control 136
Manual heating and air conditioning........................136
Dual automatic temperature control........................140
Rear window defroster .................................146
Remote Start ........................................146
Seats 148
Sitting in the correct position ............................148
Head restraints.......................................149
Manual seats ........................................152
Power seats .........................................153
Memory function .....................................155
Rear seats ..........................................158
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 168
HomeLink® wireless control system .......................169
Auxiliary Power Points 173
Storage Compartments 176
Center console .......................................176
Overhead console .....................................176
Starting and Stopping the Engine 177
Ignition switch .......................................178
Engine block heater ...................................182
Table of Contents 3
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuel and Refueling 184
Fuel quality .........................................185
Refueling...........................................188
Fuel consumption .....................................190
Transmission 194
Automatic transmission.................................194
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 203
Four wheel drive .....................................203
Brakes 212
Brakes .............................................212
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes ......................213
Parking brake........................................213
Hill start assist .......................................213
Traction Control 215
TractionControl™....................................215
Stability Control 216
AdvanceTrac® .......................................217
Terrain Response 219
Hill descent control ...................................219
Parking Aids 221
Sensing system.......................................221
Rear-view camera system ...............................224
Cruise Control 228
Usingcruisecontrol...................................228
4Table of Contents
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Driving Aids 230
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA).............................................230
Steering ............................................235
Auto leveling suspension ................................236
Load Carrying 237
Roof racks and load carriers .............................237
Vehicle loading .......................................238
Cargo management system ..............................244
Towing 248
Trailertowing........................................248
Trailer brake controller-integrated .........................255
Wrecker towing ......................................261
Recreational towing ...................................262
Driving Hints 265
Economical driving ....................................265
Floormats..........................................266
Roadside Emergencies 268
Getting roadside assistance ..............................268
Hazard warning flashers ................................270
Fuel cut-off switch ....................................270
Jump-starting the vehicle ...............................271
Customer Assistance 274
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) .......................281
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) .....................281
Fuses 282
Changing a fuse ......................................282
Fuse specification chart ................................282
Table of Contents 5
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Maintenance 290
General information ...................................290
Opening and closing the hood ............................291
Under hood overview ..................................292
Engine oil dipstick ....................................293
Engine oil check......................................293
Engine coolant check ..................................294
Automatic transmission fluid check ........................298
Brake fluid check .....................................299
Fuel filter...........................................299
Washer fluid check ....................................300
Battery ............................................300
Checking the wiper blades ..............................301
Changing the wiper blades ..............................302
Air filter(s) .........................................303
Adjusting the headlamps ................................306
Changing a bulb ......................................307
Removing a headlamp ..................................308
Vehicle Care 313
Cleaning products.....................................313
Cleaning the exterior ..................................313
Waxing.............................................315
Repairing minor paint damage ............................315
Cleaning the engine ...................................315
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades .....................316
Cleaning the interior ...................................317
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens .......318
Cleaning the alloy wheels ...............................320
Vehicle storage .......................................321
6Table of Contents
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires 324
Tire care ...........................................326
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...................343
Changing a road wheel .................................347
Technical specifications.................................354
Wheel lug nut torque ..................................354
Capacities and Specifications 355
Engine specifications ..................................355
Engine drivebelt ......................................355
Part numbers ........................................360
Vehicle identification number ............................361
Vehicle certification label ...............................362
Transmission code designation............................362
Accessories 363
Accessories .........................................363
Extended Service Plan 365
Audio System 368
MyFord™ system .....................................370
Rear seat controls.....................................376
Satellite radio information ...............................380
Auxiliary input jack ...................................383
USBport...........................................384
SYNC® 386
Pairing your phone for the first time .......................391
911 Assist™ .........................................405
Vehicle Health Report ..................................408
Table of Contents 7
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 436
Voice recognition .....................................443
Listening to music ....................................447
Phone features .......................................467
Information Menu .....................................474
Settings............................................486
Climatefeatures......................................498
Navigation system.....................................502
Appendices 520
Scheduled Maintenance 538
Normal scheduled maintenance and log .....................543
Index 556
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2014
8Table of Contents
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when
using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes product features and options available
throughout the range of available models, sometimes even before they
are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may show features as used
in different models, so they may appear different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or
right-hand side. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat.
A. Right-hand side
B. Left-hand side
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
A
B
Introduction 9
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Safety alert See Owner’s
Manual
Anti-lock
braking
system
Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Battery Battery acid
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Brake system Cabin air
filter
Check fuel
cap
Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Child seat
lower anchor
Child seat
tether anchor
Cruise
control
Do not open
when hot
Engine air
filter
Engine
coolant
Engine
coolant
temperature
Engine oil Explosive gas Fan warning
Fasten safety
belt
Front airbag Front fog
lamps
Fuel pump
reset
Fuse
compartment
Hazard
warning
flasher
Heated rear
window
Interior
luggage
compartment
release
Jack
10 Introduction
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Lighting
control
Low tire
pressure
warning
Maintain
correct fluid
level
Panic alarm Parking aid
system
Parking
brake system
Power
steering fluid
Power
windows
front and
rear
Power
window
lockout
Service
engine soon
Side airbag Stability
control
Windshield
defrost and
demist
Windshield
washer and
wiper
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC® Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any
purpose. See the SYNC® chapter for more information.
Introduction 11
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal;
•How fast the vehicle was travelling;
•Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, Directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
12 Introduction
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event
Data Recorders applies to SYNC® or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash
involving the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates
to 911 Assist may also be capable of being used to electronically
or verbally provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash or personal information about the occupants to assist 911
operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If
you do not want to disclose this information, do not activate the
911 Assist feature. See your SYNC® chapter for more
information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC® chapter
for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules,
safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
more information.
Introduction 13
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience, we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access to
Account Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for
the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides
years of service is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed
in this owner’s manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or
exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent
requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development, we validate that these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine
Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only
replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to
your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, see the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
14 Introduction
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty
information that is provided to you along with your owner’s manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
Introduction 15
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this owner’s manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
owner’s manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. See this owner’s manual for all other required
information and warnings.
16 Introduction
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, or locate
your local St. John Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport Canada at 1–800–333–0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly restrain children in safety
seats made especially for their height, age, and weight may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to your child.
Child Safety 17
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or age Recommended
restraint type
Infants or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or younger).
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are less
than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall, are
greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and
upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater
than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg)
if recommended by child restraint
manufacturer).
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
•You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
•Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and
state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
•When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
18 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers or children weighing
40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
•Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
•Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
Child Safety 19
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
•Place the vehicle seat upon which the child seat will be installed in
the upright position.
•Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This
vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
20 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
Child Safety 21
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, for example, by pressing
down or kneeling on the child
restraint while pulling up on the
shoulder belt in order to force slack
from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to
achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will provide extra help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5
centimeters) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed.
In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for referral
to a Child Passenger Safety Technician.
22 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury
or death.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two
lower anchors located where the vehicle seatback and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Using Tether Straps in
this chapter.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
Child Safety 23
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback, below the locator symbols on the
seatback. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH attachments.
The locator symbols are on round plastic buttons for the center seat and
on rectangular tags for the outboard seats.
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
See Using Tether Straps in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
24 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor.
Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
In the third row center seating position, the tether anchor is a loop at
the bottom of the seat back.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view).
•Second row bench seat
•Second row bucket seats
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
Child Safety 25
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
Second row seating positions
1. For center seating positions, route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
For outboard seating positions, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the head restraint posts. If the top of the safety
seat hits the head restraint, recline the seat back slightly to obtain
proper fit.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
•Second row outboard seating
positions
•Second row center seating
position (if equipped)
26 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
3. Grasp the tether strap and
position it to the seat frame.
4. Rotate the tether strap, and clip
the tether strap to the anchor on
the seat frame.
5. Rotate the tether strap clip.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Child Safety 27
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Third row center seating position
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
2. Locate the anchor webbing loop for the seating position.
•You may need to pull back the top of the hinged panel along the
bottom of the seat back to access the tether anchor.
3. Clip the tether strap through the anchor loop as shown. If the tether
strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a crash.
28 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. If the
safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a
crash greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when the child is seated without a booster seat.
•Can the child sit all the way
back against their vehicle seat
with knees bent comfortably at
the edge of the seat cushion?
•Can the child sit without
slouching?
Child Safety 29
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
•Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
•Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
•Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seatback or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seatback or
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
•High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
30 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings
compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to
the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The
drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the
child’s hips.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat upon which it is being used,
placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster
seat may improve this condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than
this under the booster seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Child Safety 31
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
vehicle seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. If all children cannot be seated and
restrained properly in a rear seating position, properly restrain the
largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and
warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by your
vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly installed or
utilized, is inappropriate for your child’s height, age or weight, or does
not properly fit the child, may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
32 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: To avoid risk of injury, do not leave children or pets
unattended in your vehicle.
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for
children
Restraint
Typ e
Combined
weight of
child and
child seat
Use any attachment method as indicated
belowbyX.
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear-facing
child seat
Up to
65 lb
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-facing
child seat
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg) X
Forward-facing
child seat
Up to
65 lb
(29.5 kg)
XXX
Forward-facing
child seat
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg) XX
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against the vehicle seat upon
which it is installed. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See the Seats chapter for information on head restraints.
Child Safety 33
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The childproof locks are located on the rear edge of
each rear door and must be set separately for each
door.
Move the lock control up to engage the childproof
lock.
Move it down to disengage the lock.
34 Child Safety
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seat back upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
Safety Belts 35
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
•Lap and shoulder safety belts.
•Shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
•Height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions.
•Safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions.
•Safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety Belt
Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in the
Supplemental Restraints System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body when activated. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal crashes, the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
36 Safety Belts
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in your vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seatback upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Safety Belts 37
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belts. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle crash, the safety belt system at all
passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or
any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked
by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode. The front
outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking
modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of about 5 mph (8 km/h) or
more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
38 Safety Belts
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See the Child Safety chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, you can obtain a
safety belt extension assembly from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is on a label located either at the end of
the webbing or on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use the safety belt
extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended.
Safety Belts 39
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Squeeze the side release buttons
and slide the height adjuster up or
down.
2. Pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place.
Second Row Comfort Guide
WARNING: Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The second row outboard lap and
shoulder belt is equipped with a belt
comfort guide. This guide is attached
to the quarter trim panel. Use it to
adjust the comfort of the shoulder belt
for smaller occupants in the outboard
second row seats.
40 Safety Belts
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide (the portion of the belt
between the latch tongue and the
D-ring, not the portion where the
belt exits from the quarter trim
panel).
2. Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is
centered on the occupant’s shoulder.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If... Then...
The driver safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Safety Belts 41
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT-MINDER™
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders that intermittently sound a tone and illuminate the
safety belt warning light when you are in the driver seat and the safety
belt is unbuckled.
If... Then...
You buckle your safety belt
before you switch the ignition
on or less than 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the
ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature will not
activate.
You do not buckle your safety
belt before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
elapse after you switch the
ignition...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates
and a warning tone sounds for
6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating
for about 5 minutes or until you
buckle your safety belt.
The driver safety belt is
unbuckled for about one
minute while the vehicle is
traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than
1-2 minutes elapse after you
switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
safety belt warning light illuminates
and a warning tone sounds for
6 seconds every 25 seconds, repeating
for about 5 minutes or until you
buckle your safety belt.
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder™ Feature
WARNING: While the system allows you to deactivate it, this
system is designed to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle.
Read Steps1-4thoroughly before proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
•The parking brake is set.
•The transmission is in park (P).
42 Safety Belts
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•The ignition is off.
•All vehicle doors are closed.
•The driver safety belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (about 1 to
2 minutes).
•You must complete Steps 3 and 4 within 60 seconds or you will have
to repeat the procedure.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled. The safety belt warning light will turn on.
4. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. The safety belt warning light will
flash.
This will switch the feature off if it is currently on.
This will switch the feature on if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a crash. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use
in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. However, if the crash was
minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage
and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the
Vehicle Care chapter.
Safety Belts 43
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently, and the risk
of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
WARNING:
All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided. Failure to properly wear your
safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module, as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses as you could be
seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation as this may result in
serious injury.
WARNING:
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
44 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for example, baking soda) that
result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small
amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin
and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, contact
with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling. Temporary
hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with
considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries, such as
fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to
occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the
airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
RESTRAINT SAFETY SYSTEM
The Restraint Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Restraint Safety System consists of:
•Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
•Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
•Driver seat position sensor.
Supplementary Restraints System 45
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Front crash severity sensors.
•Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors.
•Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
•The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Restraint Safety System work?
The Restraint Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners
and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the direction indicator lamps and the horn sounds
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
equipped on your vehicle.
The horn and lamps turn off when:
•You press the hazard button.
•You press the panic button (if equipped) on the remote entry
transmitter.
•Your vehicle runs out of power.
46 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
•Driver and passenger airbag modules.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING:
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
•Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
•
Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.
Supplementary Restraints System 47
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is
very important that they continue to sit properly. Properly seated
occupants sit upright, lean against the seat back, and center themselves
on the seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat upon which the child seat is installed all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a crash.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the front seats),
or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying
airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
48 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag,
as you could be seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat) must
be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the
front seats. In certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the side affected
by the crash will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact crashes.
The system consists of the
following:
•A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are
found on your vehicle.
•Side airbags located inside the
seatback of the driver and front
passenger seats.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
Supplementary Restraints System 49
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SAFETY CANOPY™ CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a
deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain
airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags, as you could be
seriously injured or killed. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided. Failure to
properly wear your safety belt could seriously increase the risk of injury
or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag.
WARNING: If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain
airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags (including the
A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
50 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side crashes or when a
certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain sideways crashes or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided
in side impact crashes and rollover events.
The system consists of:
•Safety canopy curtain airbags
located above the trim panels
over the front and rear side
windows identified by wording on
the B-pillar trim.
•A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air
curtain deployment.
•Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in this
chapter.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety Canopy included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
Supplementary Restraints System 51
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which
provide information to the restraints control module. The restraints
control module deploys (activates) the front safety belt pretensioners,
driver airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the
Safety Canopy. Based on the type of accident (frontal impact, side
impact or rollover) the restraints control module will deploy the
appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See the
Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
•The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
•The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
•A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains frontal or
sideways deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
52 Supplementary Restraints System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for
both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (for example, crash severity, belt
usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
•The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and
near-frontal crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts)
unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration.
•The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in rollovers.
•The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact
crashes. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation.
•The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact
crashes or rollover events. The Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags must be
disposed of by qualified personnel.
Supplementary Restraints System 53
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
•remotely lock or unlock the vehicle doors
•remotely open the power liftgate (if equipped)
•remotely start or stop the engine (if equipped)
•arm and disarm the anti-theft system (if equipped)
•activate the panic alarm
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
•weather conditions
•nearby radio towers
•structures around your vehicle
•other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by
other short-distance radio transmissions, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm
systems. If the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press
any button unintentionally.
54 Keys and Remote Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your
vehicle and authorize your vehicle to unlock when one of the following
conditions is met:
•You touch any button on the keypad.
•You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is present in the area or if the
transmitter battery is low, it may be necessary to mechanically unlock
your door. You can use the mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this situation. Refer to Remote
Control in this chapter for more information on the location and use of
the mechanical key blade.
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters (IKTs) (If Equipped)
Use the key blade to start your
vehicle and unlock or lock the driver
door from outside your vehicle. The
transmitter portion functions as the
remote control.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with
a security label that provides
important key cut information. Keep
the label in a safe place for future
reference.
CAUTION
TO BE REMOVED
BY CUSTOMER ONLY
Keys and Remote Control 55
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)
Your intelligent access keys operate
the power locks and the remote
start system. The key must be in
your vehicle to activate the
push-button start system.
The intelligent access key also
contains a removable mechanical key
blade that you can use to unlock the
driver door. Slide the release on the
back of the transmitter to release the
key blade, and then pull the blade
out.
Note: Your vehicle’s back-up keys
came with a security tag that
provides important key cut
information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the
back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from your
vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032
or equivalent.
56 Keys and Remote Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key
ring to remove the battery cover (1).
2. Carefully peel up the rubber gasket (2)
from the transmitter if it does not come off
with the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery (3).
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the integrated
keyhead transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Reinstall the rubber gasket.
6. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Intelligent Access Transmitter
1. Remove the backup key from the transmitter.
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab
hidden behind the backup key head
to remove the battery cover. Do not
use the backup key to remove the
cover or you could damage the
intelligent access key.
3. Remove the old battery.
3
2
1
Keys and Remote Control 57
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4. Insert a new battery with the +facing downward. Press the battery
down to make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter and install the
backup key.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
The memory feature allows you to recall the driver seat, power mirrors,
power adjustable pedal and power steering column (if equipped) memory
positions.
Press the unlock button on the remote control or activate intelligent
access to recall memory. The mirrors and pedals will move to the
memory position and the seat and steering column will move to the easy
entry position (if you have switched on the easy entry feature). The seat
and column will move to the final position when you switch on the
ignition.
Programming Memory to the Remote Control
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Move the memory features to the
desired positions using the
associated controls.
3. Press and hold memory button 1,
located on the driver seat side, for
five seconds. A tone will sound in
about two seconds. Continue to hold
until you hear a second tone.
4. Press the lock button on the remote control within three seconds.
5. Repeat this procedure for another memory button and transmitter if
desired.
Deactivating Memory from the Remote Control
1. Press and hold the desired memory button for five seconds. You will
hear a tone in about two seconds. Continue to hold until you hear a
second tone.
2. Press the unlock button on the remote control.
3. Repeat this procedure for each additional transmitter if desired.
2
1
58 Keys and Remote Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will sound
and the turn signals will flash. We recommend you use this
method to locate your vehicle, rather than using the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use remote start if
your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel.
The remote start button is on the transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle from outside your vehicle.
The transmitter has an extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can be configured to operate
when the vehicle is remote started. See the Climate Control chapter for
more information. A manual climate control system will run at the setting
it was set to when your vehicle was last turned off.
Many states and provinces have restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
•the ignition is on
•the alarm system is triggered
•you disable the feature
•the hood is open
•the transmission is not in P
•the vehicle battery voltage is too low
•the service engine soon light is on.
Keys and Remote Control 59
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other.
Your vehicle will not remote start and the horn will not sound if you do
not follow this sequence.
The label on your transmitter
details the starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to start, unless quiet start is on.
Quiet start will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. You
can switch it on or off in the information display. See the Information
Displays chapter.
Note: If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must switch the ignition on before driving your vehicle.
If you remote start your vehicle with an intelligent access transmitter,
you must have a programmed intelligent access key inside your vehicle
and press the START/STOP button on the instrument panel once while
applying the brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will not work during the remote start and the radio
will not turn on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and your vehicle will run for 5, 10, or
15 minutes, depending on the setting. See the Information Displays
chapter to select the duration of the remote start system.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with your vehicle still running to extend the run
time for another remote start duration. If the duration is set to last
10 minutes, the duration will extend by another 10 minutes beginning
after what is left of the first activation time. For example, if your vehicle
had been running from the first remote start for five minutes, your
vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 15 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown.
60 Keys and Remote Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting
Press the button once. The parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of the running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start system through the
information display. See the Information Display chapter.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
You can purchase replacement or additional keys or remote controls from
an authorized dealer. A dealer can program the transmitters to your
vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the Security
chapter for information on programming your transmitters.
Keys and Remote Control 61
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed are referred to as
administrator keys or admin keys. These can be used to:
•Create a MyKey.
•Program configurable MyKey settings.
•Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you can access the following
information using the information display:
•How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to your vehicle.
•The total distance your vehicle has traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the same settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles with intelligent access (push-button start), when both
a MyKey and an admin transmitter are present, the admin transmitter
will be recognized to start the vehicle.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user:
•Belt-Minder. You cannot disable this feature. The audio system will
mute when the front seat occupants’ safety belts are not fastened.
•Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning activates earlier, giving the
MyKey user more time to refuel.
•Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on:
traction control, parking aid, blind spot information system (BLIS)
with cross traffic alert, lane departure warning and the forward
collision warning system.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain MyKey settings when you
first create a MyKey and before you recycle the key or restart the
vehicle. You can also change the settings afterward with an admin key.
•A vehicle speed limit can be set. Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your vehicle reaches the set speed.
You cannot override the set speed by fully depressing the accelerator
pedal or by setting cruise control.
•Various vehicle speed minders can be set. Once you select a speed, it
will be shown in the display, followed by an audible tone when the
preselected vehicle speed is exceeded.
62 MyKey
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Audio system maximum volume of 45% for some audio systems. A
message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the
limited volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or compensated automatic
volume control will be disabled.
•Always on setting. When this is selected, you will not be able to turn
off certain features.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a MyKey.
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition.
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information display. Press SETUP
using the information display buttons until PRESS RESET TO
CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
4. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO
CONFIRM MYKEY will be displayed.
5. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK
THIS AS RESTRICTED is displayed Wait until KEY
RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings for the key(s). Refer to
Programming/Changing Configurable Settings.
Programming/Changing Configurable Settings
Use the Information display to access your configurable MyKey settings:
1.
Switch the ignition on with an admin key. If your vehicle has keyless
start, place the intelligent access transmitter into the backup slot. The
location of your backup slot is in another chapter. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine.
2. Access the main menu on the information display controls and press
SETUP until you see RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS in the display.
3. Press and release the RESET button to display the MyKey setup menus.
4. Press the SETUP button to display the next menu and scroll through
your choices.
5. Within any of the menus, press RESET to highlight your choice. Use the
arrow buttons to make a selection.
6. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next configurable setting will
display.
7. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the configurable
settings.
MyKey 63
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear all MyKeys within the same key cycle as you created the
MyKey. If you switch your ignition off, however, you will need to use an
admin key to clear your MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and
return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the information display to
do the following:
1. Press SETUP until you see PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY in
the display.
2. Press and release the RESET button. You will see HOLD RESET
TO CONFIRM CLEAR in the display.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until you see
ALL MYKEYS CLEARED in the display.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the
information display.
MYKEY DISTANCE
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete
the accumulated distance is by using an admin key to clear your MyKey.
If the distance does not accumulate as expected, then the intended user
is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
NUMBER OF MYKEY(S)
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for your vehicle and
determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY(S)
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use
this feature to determine how many unrestricted keys you have for your
vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has been programmed.
64 MyKey
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, please see
your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system .
Vehicles With Ford-approved Aftermarket Remote Start Systems
When using a Ford-approved aftermarket remote start system, the
vehicle recognizes the remote start system as an additional admin key. It
is the vehicle’s default setting. You can also program the remote start as
a MyKey. As a result, the MyKey system status menu display includes
the remote start system as an additional key in the total count of
MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED. See
Checking MyKey System Status.
When you start your vehicle with a Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start system, the system stalls the vehicle after you open the door or
shift the vehicle into gear. This is intentional. When you restart your
vehicle, it reads your real key’s status instead of the remote start
system’s status.
As an added precaution, owners may want to program the remote start
system as a MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote start fob. That
way, when the MyKey driver starts the vehicle with the remote start
system, the MyKey restrictions remain active.
With a Ford-approved aftermarket remote start system, it is possible to
program all real keys as MyKeys unintentionally. If this happens, then the
remote start fob is the admin key. If you want to have only one real key
as a MyKey, or do not want to have any MyKeys, then you need to use
your remote start to clear all MyKeys. In that case, follow these steps:
•Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
•Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
•See Clearing All MyKeys. Follow Steps 1-3.
After clearing your MyKeys, you can create a new MyKey. See Creating
a MyKey.
MyKey 65
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicles With Non-Ford-approved Aftermarket Remote Start Systems
MyKey is not compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, please see a
Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved system.
The following information may help customers who choose to install a
non-Ford-approved remote start system. The actions provided below do
not make MyKey compatible with non-Ford-approved remote start
systems, but may help you retain some MyKey functions.
When using a non-Ford-approved remote start system, the vehicle may
recognize the remote start system as an additional admin key with its
associated privileges. If you restart the vehicle by inserting a key into the
ignition cylinder and recycling the ignition completely, then you may
retain some MyKey functions. This action forces your vehicle to read the
traditional key instead of the remote start fob and then uses the key’s
associated privileges.
Note: The MyKey system status menu display may include the remote
start system as an additional key in the total count of MYKEY(S)
PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED. See Checking
MyKey System Status.
As an added precaution, owners may want to program the remote start
system as a MyKey, if the MyKey driver uses the remote start fob. That
way, when the MyKey driver starts the vehicle with the remote start
system, the MyKey restrictions will be remain active.
With a non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote start system, it is possible
to program all real keys as MyKeys unintentionally. If this happens, then
the remote start fob is the admin key. If you want to have only one real
key as a MyKey, or do not want to have any MyKeys, then you need to
use your remote start to clear all MyKeys. In that case, follow these
steps:
•Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
•Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob.
•See Clearing All MyKeys. Follow Steps 1-3.
After clearing your MyKeys, you can create a new MyKey. See Creating
a MyKey.
66 MyKey
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential causes
I cannot create a
MyKey.
•The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
•The key or fob used to start the vehicle is
the only admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
•Vehicles with push button start: The
intelligent access key is not positioned
correctly next to the steering column or
placed in a backup slot. See Starting and
Stopping the Vehicle.
•SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
•The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems.
I cannot program the
configurable settings.
•The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey.
•The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems.
I cannot clear the
MyKeys.
•The key or fob used to start the vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey.
•The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See Using MyKey With
Remote Start Systems
MyKey 67
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Condition Potential causes
I lost the only admin
key.
•Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost a key. •Program a spare key. See SecuriLock in the
Security chapter.
I accidentally
programmed all keys
as MyKeys.
•The vehicle has a remote start system that
is recognized as an admin key. Clear all
MyKeys by using the remote start. See Using
MyKey With Remote Start Systems.
•Your vehicle’s system does not recognize any
programmed MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey.
MyKey total includes
one additional key.
•An unknown key has been created as a
MyKey.
•The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems.
Admin key total
includes one additional
key.
•An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as an admin key.
•The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems.
MyKey distances do
not accumulate.
•The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
•An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
•The key system has been reset.
No MyKey functions
with the Intelligent
Access key.
•An admin fob is present at the vehicle start.
•No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey.
68 MyKey
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Remote Control
You can use the remote control anytime your vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. The unlocking mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent access.
Intelligent access at the driver door unlocks all doors when you have
disabled two-stage unlocking.
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will sound and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are
closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage compartment is open, or if the hood is
open on vehicles with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
sounds twice and the lamps will not flash.
A B
Locks 69
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Activating Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
You must have the intelligent access key within 3 feet (1 meter) of your
vehicle.
At the Front Driver Door
Press any number on the SecuriCode keyless entry keypad.
After locking the doors with the lock
sensor, there is a brief delay before
you can unlock your vehicle. This
delay lets you pull the door handle
to make sure that it locked.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean to avoid issues with operation.
Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of your
vehicle if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle with the
power door lock control, all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is
still in the ignition.
You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition. To do this,
use the keyless entry keypad with the driver door closed, or press the
lock button on the transmitter even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock your vehicle by any method,
regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)
This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your
intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you lock your vehicle using the driver or passenger power door
lock control (with the door open, transmission in Pand ignition off),
after you close the door your vehicle will search for an intelligent access
key in the passenger compartment. If your vehicle finds a key, all of the
doors will immediately unlock and the horn will sound, indicating that a
key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the
intelligent access key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all the doors by:
•using the keyless entry keypad
70 Locks
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•pressing the lock button on another intelligent access key
When you open one of the front doors and lock your vehicle using the
power door lock control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
•the ignition is on, or
•the ignition is off and the transmission is not in P.
Autolock Feature (If Enabled)
The autolock feature will lock all the doors when:
•all the doors are closed,
•the ignition is on,
•you shift into any gear putting your vehicle in motion, and
•your vehicle reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
•you open then close any door while the ignition is on and the vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
•your vehicle then reaches a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature (If Enabled)
The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when:
•the ignition is on, all the doors are closed, and your vehicle has been
in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h);
•your vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is switched off
or to accessory; and
•the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being
switched off or to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you electronically lock the vehicle
after you switch the ignition off and before you open the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling
Note: You can enable or disable the autolock and autounlock features
independently of each other.
You can enable or disable these features:
•through an authorized dealer
•using the information display (if equipped with this feature).
Locks 71
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when you use the
integrated keyhead transmitter, intelligent access key or the keyless
entry keypad to unlock the vehicle.
The system will turn off the lights if:
•you switch the ignition on
•you press the lock button on the remote control
•you lock your vehicle using the keyless entry keypad
•after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
•you turn them on with the dimmer control
•any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior lamps illuminate when all doors
are closed and you switch the ignition off and remove the key from the
ignition (integrated keyhead transmitter only).
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain closed and:
•25 seconds elapse
•you insert the key in the ignition (integrated keyhead transmitter
only)
•you press the START/STOP button (intelligent access key only).
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome lamps or headlamps on, the
battery saver shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch the ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
(If Equipped)
If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition state, it will shut off once it
detects a certain amount of battery drain or after 45 minutes.
72 Locks
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
LIFTGATE
WARNING: Do not allow people to travel in any area of your
vehicle that does not have seats and safety belts. Riding in a
cargo area, inside or outside of the vehicle, is extremely dangerous. In a
crash, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Make sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt correctly. Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury or death.
Manual Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent
drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into
your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything (bike rack, etc.) from the spoiler, glass or
liftgate. This could damage the liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while driving. This could damage
the liftgate and its components.
The liftgate area is only intended for cargo, not passengers.
To open the liftgate: Press the button located inside of the liftgate
handle.
Locks 73
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Power Liftgate (If Equipped)
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
WARNING: Keep keys out of the reach of children. Do not allow
children to operate the power liftgate, or to play near an open or
moving power liftgate.
Note: Cycling the ignition while the liftgate is power closing and is near
the latch may cause the liftgate to reverse to full open position. Make
sure you close the liftgate before operating or moving the vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, such as a garage or a parking structure. You
could damage the liftgate or its components.
Note: Do not drive with the liftgate open without first disabling the
power function and securing the liftgate to the vehicle.
Note: In case of operation in extreme cold -40°F (-40°C), or on extreme
inclines, manual operation of the liftgate is suggested.
You can enable or disable the power liftgate using the information
display. The remote control and instrument panel button still operates
the liftgate regardless of the setting.
Opening and Closing the Power Liftgate
Note: You can reverse the liftgate movement direction with a second
press of the instrument panel button or the button on the liftgate, or a
second double press of the transmitter button.
The liftgate only operates with the vehicle in P.
Three tones sound as the liftgate begins to power close. A single tone
indicates a problem with the close request, caused by any of the
following:
•The ignition is on and the transmission is not in P.
•The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage
•The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h)
74 Locks
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after an open request, a fast
continuous tone indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut
failure. Have the system checked by an authorized dealer if you still have
a fast tone after removing the load.
To open or close from the instrument panel: Press the
instrument panel liftgate button.
To open or close with the remote control: Press the remote
control liftgate-decklid button twice within three seconds.
To open with the liftgate control
button in the liftgate handle:
1. Unlock the liftgate with the
remote control or power door
unlock button.
2. Press the control button A
located on the inside of the
liftgate pull handle.
Note: Allow the power system to
open the liftgate after pressing the
control. Manually pushing or pulling
the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and
stops the power operation.
To close with the cargo area
liftgate control button: Press and
release the cargo area liftgate
control button located on the left
rear cargo area trim panel.
WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
E187797
Locks 75
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
To open the liftgate window:
Press the window release button B
located inside the liftgate pull
handle.
Obstacle Detection
When closing: The liftgate reverses to full open when it detects an
obstacle. A chime sounds three times as the liftgate begins to reopen.
Remove the obstacle to close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your
vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection. To prevent this, let the
power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle. Before
driving off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar
message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving.
When opening: The system stops when it detects an obstacle and a
tone sounds three times. Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate.
Resetting the Power Liftgate
The liftgate may not operate properly and you may need to reset it if any
of the following conditions occur:
•A low voltage or dead battery.
•Disconnected battery.
•The liftgate is manually closed and left ajar (unlatched).
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds, and then reconnect the
battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
3. Power open the liftgate by using the remote control or the
instrument panel button.
76 Locks
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD (IF EQUIPPED)
The keypad, located near the driver window, is invisible until touched
and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad, the unlock
function may not work. Enter your entry code again more slowly.
You can use the keypad to:
•lock or unlock the doors
•recall memory features
•enable or disable the autolock and
autounlock
•arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm
You can operate the keypad with the factory-set 5-digit entry code. This
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from an authorized dealer. You can also create up to three of
your own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press the 1•2on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You must enter each number within
five seconds of each other.
4. For memory recall feature, enter the sixth digit 1•2to store driver 1
settings or 3•4to store driver 2 settings.
Note: Pressing 5•6,7•8,or9•0keypad numbers as a sixth digit will
not recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
5. The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that programming is
complete.
You may also program a personal entry code through the MyFord Touch
system. Refer to the MyFord Touch chapter.
Tips:
•Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
•Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
•The factory-set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Locks 77
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1•2on the keypad within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1•2for two seconds. This must be done within five
seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory-set 5-digit code
will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if you enter the wrong code
seven times (35 consecutive button presses). This mode disables the
keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
•one minute of keypad inactivity
•pressing the unlock button on the remote control
•switching the ignition on
•unlocking the vehicle using intelligent access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To unlock the driver door: Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate. Note: All doors will unlock if
the two-stage unlocking feature is disabled. Refer to Locking and
Unlocking earlier in this chapter.
To unlock all doors: Enter the factory-set code or your personal code,
then press 3•4within five seconds.
To lock all doors: Press and hold 7•8and 9•0at the same time with
the driver door closed. You do not need to enter the keypad code first.
78 Locks
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SECURILOCK® PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting your vehicle. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart your
vehicle if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in your vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
The system helps prevent the engine from starting unless you use a coded
key programmed to your vehicle. Using the wrong key may prevent your
vehicle from starting. A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has occurred. A message may appear in the information display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after you switch the ignition off.
Anti-Theft Indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
•When the ignition is off, the indicator will flash once every
two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
•When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds, then
turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is on. If this occurs, switch the
ignition off then back on to make sure there was no electronic
interference with the programmed key. If your vehicle does not start, try
to start it with the second programmed key and if successful contact
your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator still
flashes rapidly or glows steadily, your vehicle will not start. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
Automatic Disarming
Your vehicle disarms when you switch the ignition on with a coded key.
Security 79
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle may come with two integrated keyhead transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra coded key, you will need to
have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to
be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to
help prevent any inconveniences. See an authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Key
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle. Only four of these eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both
the engine immobilizer key code and the remote entry portion of the
remote control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
80 Security
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six
seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
The key will start the vehicle’s engine and will operate the remote entry
system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter) if it has
been successfully programmed. The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, the theft indicator light may
flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. Take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key programmed
if you are still unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.
Intelligent Access Key (if equipped)
Your intelligent access key functions as a programmed key that operates
the driver door lock and activates intelligent access with the push button
start system, or the remote start system. If your programmed intelligent
access transmitters are lost or stolen, and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized
dealer. Your dealer will erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys. Store an extra programmed key away from the
vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconvenience. See your
authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key
See an authorized dealer to have additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.
Security 81
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound when:
•any door or the hood is opened without using the key or the remote
control
•the ignition is turned on with an invalid key.
Take all keys and remote controls to your authorized dealer if there is
any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. Lock the vehicle
to arm the alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate
the alarm is in the pre-armed mode and will become fully armed in
20 seconds.
Disarming the Alarm
To disarm the alarm, do any of the following:
•Press the power door unlock button within the 20-second pre-armed
mode.
•Press the unlock button on the remote control.
•Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad.
•Turn the ignition on with a valid key.
•Press the panic button on the remote control. The alarm system will
still be armed, but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding.
Note: If the driver’s door is unlocked with a key, a chime will sound
when you open the door. You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm
using any of the actions above, otherwise the alarm will trigger.
82 Security
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
Manual Adjust Steering Wheel (If Equipped)
1. Unlock the steering wheel.
Note: The telescopic adjustment is
an optional feature.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. Lock the steering wheel.
Steering Wheel 83
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Power Adjust Steering Wheel (If Equipped)
Use the control on the side of the
steering column to tilt the position.
Memory Feature
The steering column positions are saved and recalled with the memory
feature. Refer to the Seats chapter.
Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall will cancel the
operation. The column will respond to the adjustment control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column will move to the full up position when the ignition is
switched off. It will return to the previous position when the ignition is
switched on. This feature can be switched on or off in the information
display.
84 Steering Wheel
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AUDIO CONTROL
Type One
A. Seek up or next
B. Volume up
C. Volume down
D. Seek down or previous
Steering Wheel 85
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Type Two
A. Volume up
B. Seek up or next
C. Media
D. Seek down or previous
E. Volume down
Media
Press the media button repeatedly to scroll through available audio
modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
•tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset
•play the next or previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
•tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band
•seek through a track.
86 Steering Wheel
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Type One
A. Phone mode
B. Voice recognition
Press OK to confirm selection.
See the SYNC or Navigation System chapter.
Steering Wheel 87
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Type Two
A. Phone mode
B. Voice recognition
Press OK to confirm selection.
See the SYNC or Navigation System chapter.
CRUISE CONTROL
See the Cruise Control chapter.
88 Steering Wheel
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never use the controls when your feet are on the
accelerator or brake pedals, especially when the vehicle is
moving.
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your vehicle is in park (P).
Depending on your vehicle and equipment level, the shape and location
of your power-adjustable pedal control can vary.
•If your control is vertical, then it is to the left of the steering column
and on the instrument panel.
•If your control is horizontal, then it is on the left side of the steering
column.
The Vertical Control
A. Closer.
B. Farther.
The Horizontal Control
A. Farther.
B. Closer.
Both horizontal and vertical controls operate the same way:
1. Press and hold A to move the pedals away from you.
2. Press and hold B to move the pedals closer to you
You can save and recall the pedal positions with the memory feature (if
equipped). Refer to the Seats chapter.
A
B
A B
Pedals 89
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before turning on the windshield
wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are turned off before entering a
car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave
streaks or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper
blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to bun out.
Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Rotate the end of the control:
•away from you to increase the
wiper speed
•toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes will
decrease when intermittent wipe is selected.
RAIN-SENSING WIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Wet road conditions may result in inconsistent or unexpected
wiping or smearing. Lower the sensitivity, switch to normal or high-speed
wiping or turn the wipers off to reduce smearing.
Note: Turn off the wipers before entering a car wash.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity to one of the interval
moisture settings. The wipers will
not cycle until moisture is detected
on the windshield. The wiper speed
will vary based on the amount of
moisture detected on the windshield
and the sensitivity setting. The
wipers will continue to wipe as long as moisture is detected.
1
2
1
2
90 Wipers and Washers
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
interior mirror where the sensor is located, or sensor performance may
be affected.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.
•A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid.
•A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
•A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
REAR-WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS
Rotate the control to select:
2— Intermittent operation
(shortest pause between wipes).
1— Intermittent operation (longest
pause between wipes).
0— Off.
Rotate and hold the control to either the top or bottom position to
activate the rear washer. The control will return to the 2or 0position
when you release it.
1
2
1
2
Wipers and Washers 91
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Off
B. Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
C. Headlamps
High Beams
•Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to switch on the
high beams.
•Pull the lever toward you to
switch of the high beams.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly
and release it to flash the
headlamps.
A
ABC
1
2
0
1
2
0
92 Lighting
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate
the rear lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low
visibility driving conditions. Also, the autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may
result in a collision.
When the lighting control is in the autolamps position, the headlamps
will automatically turn on in low light situations or when wipers are
activated.
The headlamps remain on for a period of time after you switch the
ignition off. Use the information display controls to adjust the period of
time that the headlamps remain on.
Note:
If your vehicle is equipped
with autolamps, it will have the
windshield wiper activated
headlamps. The windshield wiper
activated headlamps turn on within
10 seconds when you switch the
windshield wipers on and the lighting
control switch is in the autolamps
position. They will turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper activation:
•During a single wipe.
•When the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition.
•If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you have autolamps and autowipers switched on, the low beam
headlamps will turn on automatically when the windshield wipers operate
continuously.
A
Lighting 93
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and
all applicable lit components in the vehicle during
headlamp and parking lamp operation.
•Tap the top or bottom of the control to brighten/dim all
interior lit components incrementally, or
•Press and hold at the first position the top or bottom of
the control until the desired lighting level is reached.
•Press and hold the top of the control to the full on
position to activate the “dome on” feature. This will
turn on the interior courtesy lights. Press and hold the
bottom of the control to turn off the interior courtesy lights.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to switch your headlamps on in
low light situations or during inclement weather. The system does
not activate the tail lamps and may not provide adequate lighting
during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these
conditions may result in a collision.
The system turns the headlamps on with a reduced intensity output in
daylight conditions.
To switch the system on, ignition must be in the on position, then switch
the lighting control to the off, autolamp, or parking lamp position.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The fog lamps can be turned on
when the lighting control is pulled
toward you and in the headlamps,
parking lamps or autolamps
positions.
The fog lamps will not operate
when the high beams are active.
A
94 Lighting
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
DIRECTION INDICATORS
•Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
•Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
•any door is opened.
•the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the courtesy
lamps come on.
•the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
Front Row Map and Dome Lamps (If Equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
•any door is opened,
•the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
•any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
The map lamps are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
1
2
0
Lighting 95
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Second Row Map Lamps (If Equipped)
The second row map lamps are
located in the headliner above the
second row seats.
The second row map lamp lights
when:
•any door is opened,
•the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
•any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
Press the controls to activate the lamps.
Rear Cargo Lamp
The rear cargo lamp lights when:
•any door is opened, and the
switch is in the middle position.
•the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
•any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and ignition is off
(and switch is in the middle
position).
With the ignition key in the accessory or on position, the rear cargo lamp
can be turned on or off by sliding the control.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the exterior lamps and interior lamps,
except the hazard warning lamps if activated, 10 minutes after the
ignition control has been turned off. The system will not turn off the
parking lamps if the lighting control is in the parking lamps on position.
96 Lighting
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle
and do not let them play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is
open. Lower the opposite window slightly to reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the
window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down (If Equipped)
Press the switch fully and release it. Press again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up (If Equipped)
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: When you override the bounce-back feature the
window will not reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if your release the switch
before the window is fully closed.
AUTO
Windows and Mirrors 97
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Window Lock
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear and front passenger window
controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch
the ignition off, or until you open either front door.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while your vehicle is in
motion.
A. Left mirror
B. Off
C. Right mirror
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Foldaway Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Make sure that you fully
engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position.
AB
B
AC
98 Windows and Mirrors
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Using the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or
repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control
down during full travel, may disable the system to protect motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with your vehicle running,
and up to 10 minutes with your vehicle off, for the system to reset and
for function to return to normal.
Pull the control back to fold the
mirrors.
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually folded, they may not work
properly, even after you reposition them. You need to reset them if:
•The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
•The mirrors feel loose.
•The mirrors do not stay in the folded or unfolded position.
•One of the mirrors is not in its normal driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the power-folding mirror control to
fold and unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise as you reset the
power-folding mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this process as
needed each time the mirrors are manually folded.
Heated Exterior Mirror
The heated exterior mirrors switch on with the heated rear window. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors in the Climate Control chapter.
Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory
function. See Memory function in the Seats chapter.
Windows and Mirrors 99
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver’s side exterior mirror will automatically dim when the interior
auto-dimming mirror is activated.
Signal Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)
The rear-facing portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when
the turn signal is activated.
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®) with Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA) (If Equipped)
Refer to Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®) with Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA) in the Driving Aids chapter.
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
100 Windows and Mirrors
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CHILDMINDER MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
On double bin overhead consoles, the conversation mirror allows the
driver to view the rear seating area.
WARNING: Do not use the childminder mirror to view rearward
traffic, do not allow rear passengers to distract you from the
driving task, and make sure the rear view mirror has a clear view of
rearward traffic. Failure to do so could increase the risk of a crash from
an unseen vehicle, which may result in serious injury.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
childminder mirror. The door will
open to full open position.
The rear view mirror may have to
be adjusted to its lower arm
position to prevent interference
when the childminder mirror is
extended down.
REAR QUARTER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power rear quarter windows.
They may seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power rear quarter windows, you
should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that
children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the window opening.
Press and hold the VENT control to
open the windows.
Pull and hold the VENT control to
close the windows.
Note: Vehicles without a moonroof
will only have the VENT button.
SLIDETILT VENT
Windows and Mirrors 101
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SUN VISORS
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Lift the cover to switch on the
lamp.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it
is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moonroof opening.
The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof
is closed. Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it.
The moonroof control is located on the overhead console.
The moonroof has a one-touch open and close feature. To stop its motion
during the one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
102 Windows and Mirrors
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce
rumbling wind noise which may happen
with the moonroof fully open. Press and
release the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to
close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle detected.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override the function. While bounce-back is active, the closing
force increases for each of the next three times the moonroof is closed.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to move the moonroof to the vent
position. Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof.
Windows and Mirrors 103
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Type 1 and 2
A. Tachometer
B. Information display (Type 2 shown Type 1 similar)
C. Speedometer
D. Fuel gauge
E. Engine coolant temperature gauge
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle has travelled.
Outside air temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Trip Computer
See Trip Computer in Information Displays.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See Information Displays.
104 Instrument Cluster
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when your vehicle is moving or
on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will indicate approximately how much
fuel is left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol
indicates on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
The needle should move toward F when you refuel your vehicle. If the
needle points to E after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle needs
service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle position is normal:
•It may take a short time for the needle to reach F after leaving the gas
station. This is normal and depends upon the slope of pavement at the
gas station.
•The fuel amount dispensed into the tank is a little less or more than
the gauge indicated. This is normal and depends upon the slope of
pavement at the gas station.
•If the gas station nozzle shuts off before the tank is full, try a different
gas pump nozzle.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel gauge needle is at 1/16th.
Variations:
Driving type (fuel
economy conditions) Fuel gauge position Distance-to-empty
Highway driving 1/16th 35 miles to 80 miles
(56 km to 129 km)
Severe duty driving (trailer
towing, extended idle)
1/16th 35 miles (56km)
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Shows the temperature of the engine coolant. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will remain in the center section. If the needle
enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the engine, switch
the ignition off and determine the cause once the engine has cooled down.
Note: Do not restart the engine until the cause of overheating has been
resolved.
Instrument Cluster 105
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot. The hot coolant is under pressure and
may cause serious burns.
Type 3
A. Left Information Display
B. Speedometer
C. Right Information Display. See the MyTouch chapter for more
information.
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display. Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle has travelled.
Trip Computer
See Trip Computer in Information Displays.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See Information Displays.
106 Instrument Cluster
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and
function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start
your vehicle.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking
system (without ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
Brake System
It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking
brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Instrument Cluster 107
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Cruise Control
It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is switched on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are
driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level
being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Fasten Safety belt
It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate on startup, continues to flash or remains
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by your
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Front Fog Lamps (if equipped)
It will illuminate when you switch the front fog lamps on.
108 Instrument Cluster
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
High Beam
It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on.
It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Hill descent (if equipped)
Illuminates when hill descent is switched on.
Liftgate ajar
It will illuminate when the ignition is on and liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure
It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on
to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. Refer to Wheels and Tires for more
information.
Low Washer Fluid
It will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain fault has been detected. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Instrument Cluster 109
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Service Engine Soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon”
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service
engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter. If
the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration
and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac®/Traction control is active. If
the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac®/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Transmission Tow/Haul (if equipped)
Illuminates when the Tow/Haul feature has been activated.
Refer to the Transmission chapter for transmission function
and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.
110 Instrument Cluster
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4X2
Illuminates momentarily when two-wheel drive high is selected.
4X4 High
Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged.
4X4 LOW
Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged.
4X4 AUTO
Displays when using the 4x4 system.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Turn Signal Chime
Sounds when the direction indicator has been activated to signal a turn
and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 1.5 miles
(2.4 km).
Instrument Cluster 111
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls (Type 1 and 2)
•Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
•Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to
exit a menu.
•Press the OK button to choose
and confirm a setting or message.
The arrows in the upper left corner of the display indicate additional
content available when lit.
Main menu (type 1)
From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you
can choose from the following categories:
•Display Mode
•Trip1&2
•Fuel Economy
•Driver Assist
•Settings
112 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the categories, then press the right
arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as
needed to exit back to the main menu.
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Display Mode
Distance to E
Digital Speedo
Oil Press
Oil Temp
Trans Temp
Trip1&2
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following.
Note: Pressing OK stops/starts the timer. Holding OK resets the
odometer and timer.
Trip1&2
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Average Fuel
•Trip Odometer — Registers the distance traveled of individual
journeys.
•Trip Timer — Registers the time of individual journeys.
•Average Fuel— Indicates the average fuel consumption since the
function was last reset.
Fuel Economy
Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired energy display.
Fuel Economy
Distance to E
Inst Fuel Econ
Long term Average Fuel
Average Speed
Information Displays 113
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Driver Assist
DTE Calculation Normal history used or Towing history
used
Engine Hours Engine Hours XXXXX
Engine Idle Hours Engine Idle Hours XXXXX
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Settings
Vehicle
Trlr Sway Control - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Trilr Brake Mode Elect., Surge, None
Elect. over Hydraulic
Lighting Autolamp
Delay
Select time
interval
Locks
Autolock - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled
or uncheck disabled
Remote
Unlock
All Doors or
Driver
Oil Life Rest Set to XXX% — Hold OK to
Reset
Power Liftgate Enable or Disable switch
Wipers Courtesy Wipe
114 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Settings
*MyKey
Create MyKey Hold OK to create MyKey
911 Assist Always On or User Selectable
Do Not Disturb Always On or User Selectable
Traction Control Always On or User Selectable
Max Speed 65 MPH (105 km/h), 70 MPH
(110 km/h), 75 MPH
(120 km/h), 80 MPH
(130 km/h) or Off
Speed Minder
45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph
(89 km/h), 65 mph
(105 km/h) or Off
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Do Not Disturb Always On or User Selectable
Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
Display Setup
Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or
km/L
Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius
Language Select Language — Hold OK
to set language
*Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Main menu (type 2)
From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you
can choose from the following categories:
•Display Mode
•Trip/Fuel
•Towing
•Off Road
•Settings
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the categories, then press the right
arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as
needed to exit back to the main menu.
Information Displays 115
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Display Mode
Distance to Empty
Digital Speedometer — Press OK to change units
Gauge Detail (Oil pressure, Oil temperature and Transmission
temperature)
Engine Information (Oil life, Engine hours and Engine idle hours)
Trip/Fuel
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel
options.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Trip/Fuel
Trip1orTrip2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
•Trip 1 or Trip 2 - Shows your trip time, fuel used, odometer and
average mpg.
•Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph,
average mpg and distance to empty.
•Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is
updated each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during
30 minutes of driving. Also, shows your distance to empty.
116 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Towing
Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices.
Towing
Trailer Status
No Trailer connected
Active trailer name or
Default Trailer
Accumulated trailer
miles
Trailer brake gain
Trailer Options
Trailer Sway Control -
check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Trailer Brake Mode Elect. Surge, None or
Elec. Over Hydraulic
Change Trailer
Selected
Trailers Created
Default Trailer
No active trailer
Press OK to change
the selected trailer
Change Trailer
Settings
Rename Trailer
Reset Trailer Mileage
Delete Trailer List of named trailers
— Hold OK to Delete
Add Trailer Naming Editor
Connection Checklist
Ball Coupler Connected and locked?
Electrical Wiring Connect?
Lights Function Correctly?
Safety Chains Connected?
Tongue Jack Raised?
Mirrors Adjusted?
TBC gain setting adjusted?
Trailer Disconnected.
Trailer Setup Go to start of Add Trailer Process
Information Displays 117
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Off Road
In this mode, you can view different off road information.
Off Road
Pitch, Steering Angle and Roll
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Settings
Driver Select
Suspension Sport, Normal or Comfort
DTE Calculation Normal history used or Towing history used
118 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Settings
Advanced Settings
Vehicle
Lighting Autolamp
Delay
Select time
interval
Locks Autolock - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Remote
Unlock
Driver’s Door
or All Doors
Oil Life Remaining Life — Hold OK to
Reset
Power
Liftgate
Enable or Disable switch
Rear Park Aid- check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Wiper
Controls
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled
or uncheck disabled
*MyKey
MyKey Status Number of Admin Keys,
MyKeys and MyKey Mileage
Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
911 Assist Always On or User Selectable
Do Not
Disturb Always On or User Selectable
Traction
Control Always On or User Selectable
Max Speed 65 MPH (105 km/h),
70 MPH (110 km/h),
75 MPH (120 km/h),
80 MPH (130 km/h) or Off
Speed Minder 45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph
(89 km/h), 65 mph (105 km/h)
or Off
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
Display Setup
Distance Miles & Gallons, L/100km or
km/L
Temperature °Fahrenheit or °Celsius
Language Select Language — Hold OK to
Set
*Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Information Displays 119
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Information Display Controls (Type 3)
•Press the up and down arrow
buttons to scroll through and
highlight the options within a
menu.
•Press the right arrow button to
enter a sub-menu.
•Press the left arrow button to
exit a menu.
•Press the OK button to choose
and confirm a setting or message.
The arrows in the upper left corner of the display indicate additional
content available when lit.
Main menu (type 3)
From the main menu bar on the left side of the information display, you
can choose from the following categories:
•Display Mode
•Trip/Fuel
•Towing
•Off Road
•Settings
Scroll up/down to highlight one of the categories, then press the right
arrow key or OK to enter into that category. Press the left arrow key as
needed to exit back to the main menu.
120 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Display Mode
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.
Display Mode
Digital tachometer and fuel level gauge
Digital tachometer, fuel level gauge and engine coolant temperature
gauge
Gauge Detail (Oil pressure, Oil temperature and Transmission
temperature)
Engine Hours (Engine hours and Engine idle hours)
Oil Life
Distance to Empty
Digital Speedometer — Press OK to change the currently units
displayed
Trip/Fuel
Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel
options.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.
Trip/Fuel
Trip1orTrip2
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
•Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph
and average mpg.
•Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is
updated each minute with the fuel economy that you achieved during
30 minutes of driving.
Information Displays 121
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Towing
Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices.
Towing
Trailer Status
No trailer connected
Active trailer name or Default Trailer
Accumulated trailer miles
Trailer brake gain
Trailer Options
Trailer Sway Control - check enabled or
uncheck disabled
Trailer Brake Mode Elect. Surge, None or
Elec. Over Hydraulic
Change Trailer
Selected
Trailers Created
Default Trailer
No active trailer
Press OK to change
the selected trailer
Change Trailer
Settings
Rename Trailer
Reset Trailer Mileage
Delete Trailer
Trailer Setup Add Trailer Naming Editor
Connection Checklist
Ball Coupler Connected and locked?
Electrical Wiring Connect?
Lights Function Correctly?
Safety Chains Connected?
Tongue Jack Raised?
Mirrors Adjusted?
TBC gain setting adjusted?
Trailer disconnected?
122 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Off Road
In this mode, you can view different off road information.
Off Road
Off Road Status (Pitch, Roll, Wheel Angle)
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not appear.
Settings
Blindspot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Driver Select
Suspension Sport, Normal or Comfort
DTE
Calculation Normal or Towing
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Information Displays 123
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Settings
Advanced
Settings
Vehicle
Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Lighting Autolamp Delay Select time interval
Locks Autolock - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Remote Unlock All Doors or Driver
Oil Life Remaining Life XXX% — Hold OK to reset
Power Liftgate Enable or Disable switch
Pwr Running
Boards
Auto, Off or Out
Remote Start
Climate Control Auto or Last Setting
Seats Auto or Off
Duration 5, 10 or 15 minutes
System - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Wipers Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck
disabled
*MyKey
MyKey Status Number of Admin Keys, MyKeys and
MyKey Mileage
Create MyKey Hold OK to Create MyKey
911 Assist Always On or User Selectable
Do Not Disturb Always On or User Selectable
Traction Control Always On or User Selectable
Max Speed 65 MPH (105 km/h), 70 MPH (110 km/h),
75 MPH (120 km/h), 80 MPH (130 km/h) or
Off
Speed Minder 45 mph (72 km/h), 55 mph (89 km/h),
65 mph (105 km/h) or Off
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys
Display
Setup
Distance Miles & GAL, L/100km or km/L
Temperature °Fahrenheit or °Celsius
Gauge Display Fuel Gauge or Fuel + Tach
Language Select Language — Hold OK to Set
*Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
124 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the
menus.
AdvanceTrac® / Traction
Control Messages Action / Description
Traction control off/Traction
control on
Displays when the traction control
system has been switched off or
on. See Using Traction Control.
Service AdvanceTrac Displays when the system has
detected a condition that requires
service. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
AdvanceTrac Off Displays when the AdvanceTrac
has been switched off.
AdvanceTrac On Displays when the AdvanceTrac
has been switched on.
Alarm Messages Action / Description
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start
Vehicle
Displays when unauthorized entry
into the vehicle has occurred. Turn
the ignition on to stop the alarm.
Information Displays 125
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Battery and Charging System
Messages Action / Description
Check Charging System Stop your vehicle as soon as it is
safetodosoandswitchoffthe
ignition. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Turn Power Off to Save Battery Displays to warn of a low 12–volt
battery condition. Turn off all
unneeded electrical accessories.
Contact your authorized dealer.
Low Battery Features Temporarily
Turned Off
Displays to warn of a low 12–volt
battery condition. Turn off all
unneeded electrical accessories.
Blind Spot Information System
Messages Action / Description
Blind Spot Not Available Sensor
Blocked
Displays when the blind spot
information system/cross traffic
alert system sensors are blocked.
Driver can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Blind Spot System Fault Displays when a fault with the
blind spot information system has
occurred. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor
Blocked
Displays when the blind spot
information system/cross traffic
alert system sensors are blocked.
Driver can typically clean the
sensor to resolve.
Cross Traffic System Fault Displays when a fault with the
cross traffic alert system has
occurred. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
126 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Blind Spot Information System
Messages Action / Description
Vehicle Coming From X Displayed when the blind spot
information system with cross
traffic alert (CTA) system is
operating and senses a vehicle.
Brake System Messages Action / Description
Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low
and the brake system should be
inspected immediately.
Check Brake System Displays when the brake system
needs servicing. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is
set, the vehicle is in ready to drive
and the vehicle is driven more than
3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after the parking brake is
released, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Door Messages Action / Description
X Door Ajar Displays when the door listed is
not completely closed.
Liftgate Ajar Displays when the liftgate or
liftglass is not completely closed.
Factory Keypad Code XXXXX Displays the factory keypad code
after the keypad has been reset.
Engine Messages Action / Description
Power Reduced To Lower Engine
Temp
Displays when the engine has
reduced power to help reduce high
engine temperature.
Engine On Informs you that you are exiting
your vehicle and the engine is on.
Information Displays 127
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuel Messages Action / Description
Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displays when the fuel fill inlet
may not be properly closed.
Fuel Level LOW Displays as an early reminder of a
low fuel condition.
Keys and Intelligent Access
Messages Action / Description
No Key Detected Displayed if the intelligent access
key is not detected by the system in
the following three scenarios:
•When the start/stop button is
pressed in an attempt to either start
the engine or cycle through the
ignition states.
•When the engine is running and a
door is opened then closed.
•When the vehicle’s speed exceeds
10 mph (16 km/h) for the first time
after starting.
Key Programmed x Keys Total Displayed during spare key
programming, when an intelligent
access key is programmed to the
system.
Max Number of Keys Programmed Displayed during spare key
programming when the maximum
number of keys have been
programmed.
Press Brake to Start Displayed when the start/stop button
is pressed without the brake pedal
being applied. This is a reminder
that the brake pedal must be applied
when the start/stop button is
pressed in order to start the engine.
Restart Now or Key is Needed Displayed when the start/stop button
is pressed to shut off the engine and
a Intelligent Access Key is not
detected inside the vehicle.
128 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Keys and Intelligent Access
Messages Action / Description
Accessory Power Active Displayed when the vehicle is in the
accessory ignition state.
Starting System Fault This message is displayed when
there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Maintenance Messages Action / Description
LOW Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, turn off the engine. Check
the oil level. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on with your
engine running, see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life
remaining is 10% or less.
Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left
reaches 0%.
Engine Coolant Overtemperature Displayed when the engine coolant
temperature is excessively high.
See Manual The powertrain needs service due to
a powertrain malfunction.
Washer Fluid Level LOW Displays when the washer fluid is
low and needs to be refilled.
Factory Mode Contact Dealer Your vehicle is still in Factory mode.
This may not allow some features to
operate properly. See an authorized
dealer.
Transport Mode Contact Dealer Your vehicle is still in Transport
mode. This may not allow some
features to operate properly. See an
authorized dealer.
Information Displays 129
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MyKey® Messages Action / Description
MyKey active Drive Safely Displays when MyKey is active.
Speed Limited to xx MPH/km/h Displays when starting the vehicle
and MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top Speed Displays when a MyKey is in use and
the MyKey speed limit is on and the
vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph
(130 km/h).
Check Speed Drive Safely Displayed when a MyKey is in use
and the optional setting is on and
the vehicle exceeds a preselected
speed.
Buckle Up to Unmute Audio Displays when a MyKey is in use and
Belt-Minder® is activated.
Could Not Program Integrated Key Displays when an attempt is made to
program a spare key using two
existing MyKeys.
Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey
Setting
You have reached the speed limit set
for your MyKey.
AdvanceTrac On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac
turns on.
Traction Control On MyKey Setting With a MyKey in use, traction
control turns on.
MyKey Park Aid Cannot be
Deactivated
With a MyKey in use, park aid is
always on.
Off Road Messages Action / Description
For Off Road Slow to 5MPH Displays when your vehicle speed
requirement for off-raod mode entry
has not been met.
Enter Off Road Mode Enabled Displays when off-road mode
becomes active.
Exiting Off Road Mode Displays when off-road mode
becomes inactive.
Hill Descent Control Off Displayed when hill descent control
mode is deactivated.
130 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Off Road Messages Action / Description
For Hill Descent Reduce Speed Displayed when hill descent speed
exceeds 20 MPH (32 KM/H).
For Hill Descent Select Gear Displayed when hill descent control
mode requires driver shift
transmission into gear.
Hill Descent Driver Resume Control Displayed when the hill control
mode requires the driver to resume
control.
Hill Descent Control FAULT Displayed when a hill descent
system fault is present.
Hill Descent Control OFF System
Cooling
Displayed when hill descent control
mode is disabled to cool the brake
system.
Hill Descent Control Ready Displayed when hill descent control
mode is activated.
Park Aid Messages Action / Description
Check Park Aid Displays when the transmission is in
R (Reverse) and the park aid is
disabled.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the transmission is in
reverse (R) and the park aid is
disabled.
Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has
detected a condition that requires
service. SeeParking Aid chapter.
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status.
Power Steering Messages Action / Description
Steering loss Stop safely The power steering system has
detected a condition that requires
service. See an authorized dealer.
Information Displays 131
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Power Steering Messages Action / Description
Steering fault Service now The power steering system has
detected a condition within the
power steering system that requires
service immediately. See an
authorized dealer.
Steering assist fault Service required The power steering system has
disabled power steering assist due to
a system error. See an authorized
dealer.
Remote Start Messages Action / Description
To Drive: Turn Key to On Displays as a reminder to turn the
key on to drive the vehicle after a
remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake and START
Button
Displays as a reminder to apply the
brake and the start button to drive
the vehicle after a remote start.
Starting System Messages Action / Description
To Drive: Turn Key to On Displays when there is a problem
with your vehicle’s starting system.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Suspension System Messages Action / Description
Driver Select Susp. malfunction
Service required
Displays when there is a problem
with your vehicle’s suspension
system. See an authorized dealer for
service.
Tire Messages Action / Description
Tire Pressure LOW Displays when one or more tires on
your vehicle have low tire pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault Displays when the tire pressure
monitoring system is malfunctioning.
If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact an authorized
dealer.
132 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Tire Messages Action / Description
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault Displays when a tire pressure sensor
is malfunctioning, or your spare tire
is in use. For more information on
how the system operates under
these conditions, see theWheels
and Tires chapter. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on,
contact an authorized dealer.
Trailer Messages Action / Description
Trailer Brake Gain: XX.X No Trailer Displays the current gain setting for
the trailer brake when a trailer is
not connected.
Trailer Brake Module Fault Displays and is accompanied by a
single chime in response to faults
sensed by the TBC.
Trailer Connected Displays when a correct trailer
connection is sensed during a given
ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected Displays when a trailer connection
becomes disconnected, either
intentionally or unintentionally, and
has been sensed during a given
ignition cycle. Disregard this status
if your vehicle is not equipped with
a factory installed trailer brake
controller. This message may appear
when an aftermarket TBC is used
even when the trailer is connected.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed Displays when the trailer sway
control has detected trailer sway.
Wiring Fault On Trailer Displays if there are certain faults in
your vehicle wiring and the trailer
wiring or brake system.
Trailer Brake Gain XX.X Displays the current gain setting
from the trailer brake.
Information Displays 133
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Trailer Messages Action / Description
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See
Manual
There is a fault with your vehicle
trailer lighting module. See Towing
a Trailer.
Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Check
Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer
stop lamp. Check your lamp.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check
Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer
turn lamp. Check your lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault
Check Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer
turn lamp. Check your lamp.
Trailer Park Lamps Fault Check
Lamps
There is a fault with your trailer
park lamp. Check your lamp.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See
Manual
There is a fault with your trailer
battery. See Towing a Trailer.
Transmission Messages Action / Description
Transmission not in Park Displays as a reminder to shift into
park (P).
Neutral Tow Disabled Displays when the transfer case is
NOT in the neutral position. the
message indicates that your
vehicle is NOT safe to be towed
with all four wheels on the ground.
Neutral Tow Enabled Leave
Transmission In Neutral
Displays when the trasfer case is
in the neutral position. the
message indicates that your
vehicle is safe to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground.
4WD Messages Action / Description
Check 4X4 Displays when a 4X4 system fault
is present.
4X4 Shift In Progress Displayed when the 4X4 system is
making a shift.
For 4X4 Low Apply Brake Displays when trying to select 4X4
Low.
134 Information Displays
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4WD Messages Action / Description
For 4X4 Low Shift to N Displayed when 4X4 LOW is
selected and the vehicle is
stopped.
For 4X4 Low Slow To 3 MPH Displayed when 4X4 LOW is
selected while the vehicle is
moving.
To Exit 4X4 Low Apply Brake Displayed when 2WD is selected
while the vehicle has been stopped
in 4X4 LOW.
To Exit 4X4 Low Shift To N Displayed when 2WD is selected
while the vehicle has been stopped
in 4X4 LOW.
To Exit 4X4 Low Slow To 3 MPH Displayed when 2WD is selected
while the vehicle is operating in
4X4 LOW.
Shift Delayed Pull Forward May display when shifting to or
from 4X4 LOW.
Information Displays 135
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL WITH AUXILIARY CLIMATE
CONTROL (TYPE 1)
A. Front fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in
your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed.
B. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.
C. Air distribution control: Turn the control to switch airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system can
distribute air through any combination of these vents.
MAX A/C: Turn the control to this position to maximize cooling.
Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air
conditioning automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts
to the highest speed.
D. Auxiliary climate control fan speed: Press to increase the volume
of air circulated in the rear passenger area of the vehicle.
E. REAR (on/off): Press the button to switch the rear climate control
system on and off. or to turn on the auxiliary climate control with the
same settings as the front.
MAX
A/C
REAR RREAR
12
3
4
A/C
R
A
I H G F E D
B C
136 Climate Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
F. REAR (temperature control): Press to turn on the auxiliary climate
control system and to set the desired rear temperature with the front
control. The rear temperature is the same as the front temperature when
only the center rear temperature light (REAR) is lit. The rear
temperature is different from the front temperature when more than one
rear temperature light (REAR) is lit.
G. Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information.
H. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed
to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented
from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk
of fogging.
I. A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning compressor on or
off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
Climate Control 137
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL WITH AUXILIARY CLIMATE
CONTROL (TYPE 2)
A. Front fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in
your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed.
B. Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information.
C. Defrost: Press the button to distribute air to the windshield vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents
turn off. You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a
thin covering of ice.
D. A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning compressor on or
off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
E. MAX A/C: Press the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air
flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically
turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
138 Climate Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
F. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed
to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented
from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk
of fogging.
G. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.
H. Air distribution control: Press these buttons to switch airflow from
the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system
can distribute air through any combination of these vents.
I. Power (front): Press the button to switch the system on and off.
Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.
J. TEMP +: Press to increase the air temperature in the rear passenger
area of the vehicle.
K. TEMP –: Press to decrease the air temperature in the rear passenger
area of the vehicle.
L. REAR CNTRL: Illuminates to indicate the rear climate control system
is on.
M. Power (rear): Press the button to switch the rear climate control
system on and off.
N. Rear fan speed +: Press to increase the volume of air circulated in
the rear passenger area of the vehicle.
O. Rear fan speed –: Press to decrease the volume of air circulated in
the rear passenger area of the vehicle.
Climate Control 139
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
A. Power and Driver temperature control: Press the button to switch
the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents
outside air from entering the vehicle. Turn to increase or decrease the
air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also
adjusts the passenger side temperature when not in dual zone mode.
B. Driver climate-controlled seat (if equipped): Press the button to
switch the driver climate-controlled seat off and on.
C. Driver heated seat (if equipped): Press the button to switch the
driver heated seat off and on.
D. Passenger climate-controlled seat (if equipped): Press the
button to switch the passenger climate-controlled seat off and on.
E. Passenger heated seat (if equipped): Press the button to switch
the passenger heated seat off and on.
F. Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information.
G. Defrost: Press the button to distribute air to the windshield vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents
turn off. You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a
thin covering of ice.
140 Climate Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
H. A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning compressor on or
off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
I. MAX A/C: Press the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air
flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically
turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
J. Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in the
passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed
to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted
odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented
from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk
of fogging.
K. DUAL: Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
L. Fan speed +: Press to increase the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
M. AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts
fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside
air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the
desired temperature. You can also use the AUTO button to switch off
dual zone operation by touching and holding the button for more than
two seconds.
N. Air distribution control: Press this button to switch airflow from
the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system
can distribute air through any combination of these vents.
O. Fan speed –: Press to decrease the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Climate Control 141
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
The auxiliary climate controls are on the rear of the center console.
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may not have all
these controls on your auxiliary climate controls.
A. Fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in the rear
of your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired fan speed.
B. Driver side heated seat (if equipped): Press the button to cycle
through the driver side rear heated seat settings of high, low and off.
C. Air distribution control: Press these buttons to turn airflow from
the ceiling, center, or floor vents on or off. The system can distribute air
through any combination of these vents.
D. Passenger side heated seat (if equipped): Press the button to
cycle through the passenger side rear heated seat settings of high, low
and off.
E. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
your vehicle. Adjust to select the desired temperature.
F. Fan speed lock: Illuminates to indicate the front climate control
system is controlling rear fan speed.
142 Climate Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL OPERATING TIPS
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may cause the windows to fog
up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air from the footwell air vents
regardless of the air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside your vehicle, do not drive with
the system switched off or with recirculated air always switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front seats as this may interfere
with the airflow to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the
base of the windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach comfort in hot weather, drive with
the windows slightly open for 2-3 minutes after start-up or until your
vehicle airs out.
Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield during humid weather, adjust
the air distribution control to the windshield air vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your vehicle interior is extremely hot
or cold is not necessary. The system automatically adjusts to heat or cool
the cabin to your selected temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside temperatures, the system
directs airflow to the windshield and side window vents. In addition, the
fan may run at a slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside temperatures, or when the
inside of the vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses recirculated air
to maximize interior cooling. When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically switches to using outside air.
Climate Control 143
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with manual climate
control
Vehicle with automatic
climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the
highest speed setting.
Press the AUTO button.
2 Adjust the temperature control
to the highest setting.
Adjust the temperature control
to the desired setting.
3 Select the footwell air vents
using the air distribution
buttons.
Recommended Settings for Heating
Vehicle with manual climate
control
Vehicle with automatic
climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the
center setting.
Press the AUTO button.
2 Adjust the temperature control
to the midway point of the hot
settings.
Adjust the temperature control
to the desired setting. Use 72°F
(22°C) as a starting point, then
adjust the setting as necessary.
3 Select the footwell air vents
using the air distribution
buttons.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with manual climate
control
Vehicle with automatic
climate control
1 Press the MAX A/C position. Press the MAX A/C button.
2 Drive with the windows open
for 2-3 minutes.
144 Climate Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Vehicle with manual climate
control
Vehicle with automatic
climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to the
center setting.
Press the AUTO button.
2 Adjust the temperature control
to the midway point of the cold
settings.
Adjust the temperature control
to the desired setting. Use 72°F
(22°C) as a starting point, then
adjust the setting as necessary.
3 Select the instrument panel air
vents using the air distribution
buttons.
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
Vehicle with manual climate
control
Vehicle with automatic
climate control
1 Select the instrument panel and
footwell air vents positions
through the air distribution
control.
Press the defrost button.
2 Press the A/C button. Adjust the temperature control
to the desired setting. Use 72°F
(22°C) as a starting point, then
adjust the setting as necessary.
3 Adjust the temperature control
to the desired setting.
Direct the instrument panel side
air vents toward the side
windows.
4 Adjust the fan speed to the
highest setting.
Close the instrument panel
center vents.
5 Direct the instrument panel side
air vents toward the side
windows.
6 Close the instrument panel
center vents.
Climate Control 145
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Rear Window
Note: The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press the
control again within 15 minutes to switch it off. It turns off automatically
after approximately 15 minutes, or when you switch off the ignition.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines.
Your warranty does not cover this damage.
Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass that has frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors heat to remove ice, mist and fog when you switch on the
heated rear window.
REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED)
The remote start feature allows you to pre-condition the interior of your
vehicle. The climate control system works to achieve comfort according
to your previous settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during remote start operation.
Turn the ignition on to return the system to its previous settings. You
can now make adjustments normally, but you need to turn certain
vehicle-dependent features back on, such as:
•Heated seats.
•Cooled seats.
•Heated steering wheel.
•Heated mirrors.
•Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start settings using the information
display controls. See the Information Displays chapter.
146 Climate Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The cooled seats are
set to high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information
display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats or cools (based on
previous settings). The rear defroster, heated mirrors and heated seats
do not automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The heated seats are
set to high (if available, and selected to AUTO in the information
display). The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on.
Climate Control 147
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback,
with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a crash or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow
these guidelines:
•Do not recline the seatback more
than 30 degrees from vertical.
•Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as
possible.
•Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
•Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches (25 centimeters) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
•Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
•Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
•Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
148 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or
operate your vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head restraint when
your vehicle is moving.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible, it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head restraint properly
could reduce its effectiveness during certain impacts.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting
any head restraint. Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of
the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as
close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants of extremely
tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.
Seats 149
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Front Seat Head Restraints
The head restraints consist of :
A. An energy absorbing head restraint.
B. Two steel stems.
C. Guide sleeve adjust and release button.
D. Guide sleeve unlock and remove button.
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raise: Pull up the head restraint.
Lower:
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push down on the head restraint.
Remove:
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Reinstall Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head
restraint down until it locks.
150 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Second row outboard seat head restraints – The outboard head
restraints are non-adjustable, but you can fold them.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of:
•A trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (A).
•A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the fold strap to fold the outboard head restraint.
2. Pull up on the head restraint to place the head restraint back to the
upright position.
Second row center seat head restraint – The center rear head
restraint is fixed and non-adjustable. The head restraint consists of a
trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatback.
Third row head restraints – The third row head restraints are non
adjustable, but you can fold them.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of:
•A trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (A).
•A fold strap (B).
1. Pull the fold strap to fold the head restraint.
2. Pull up on the head restraint to place the head restraint back to the
upright position.
A
B
A
B
Seats 151
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MANUAL SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback while your
vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement,
causing loss of control of your vehicle.
WARNING: Rock the seat backward and forward after releasing
the lever to make sure that it is fully engaged.
Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward (If Equipped)
Recline Adjustment (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seat back to its original position, pull on
the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
152 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)
The lumbar support control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
Turn the control to adjust your support.
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver seat or seatback while the
vehicle is moving. This may result in sudden seat movement,
causing loss of control of your vehicle.
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Move the
switch in the direction of the arrow
to raise or lower the seat cushion or
to move the seat forward, backward,
up or down.
Seats 153
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Power Recline (If Equipped)
Move the switch to recline the
seatback forward or rearward.
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to prevent damage to the seat,
the power seats are designed to set a stopping position just short of the
end of the seat track. If the seat encounters an object while moving
forward or backward, a new stopping position will be set.
To reset the seat to its normal stopping position:
1. After encountering the new stopping position, press the power seat
control again to override.
2. Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the seat
track.
3. Continue pressing the control for about two seconds. You will feel the
seat bounce back slightly.
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Press the
forward or rearward side of the
control for more or less support.
154 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MEMORY FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
This feature will save and recall the positions of the driver seat, power
mirrors, power steering column and optional power adjustable pedals.
The memory seat control is located
on the left side of the driver seat.
Programming Memory Positions
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. To program position 1, move the memory features to their desired
position using the associated controls.
3. Press and hold button 1 for about two seconds. A tone will sound
confirming that a memory position has been set.
To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using button 2.
You can program a memory position at any time.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter, see the
Keys and Remote Control chapter.
Recalling Saved Memory Positions
To recall position 1 settings, press and release memory button 1. The
memory features will move to the saved memory 1 position.
You can also recall the memory positions when you:
•Press your remote control transmitter unlock button (if the remote
control is programmed to a memory position).
•Unlock the intelligent access driver door handle if a linked key fob is
present.
•Enter a valid Securicode personal entry code that is programmed to a
memory position.
With the Easy Entry and Exit feature on, the mirrors and pedals move to the
programmed memory position. The seat and steering column move to the
Easy Entry position. The seat and steering column move to the memory
position when you switch the ignition on or put the key in the ignition.
You can recall a programmed memory position:
•Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if the ignition is on.
•In any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
2
1
Seats 155
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped)
The Easy Entry and Exit feature adjusts the position of the seat and
steering column to allow easier exit and entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2 inches (5 centimeters) rearward
when the transmission is in park (P) and you remove the key from the
ignition or you switch the ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous position when you put the key in
the ignition or switch the ignition on.
Enable or disable this feature through the information display. See the
Information Displays chapter.
Climate Controlled Seats (If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
•Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various
heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
156 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various
cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the cooled seats are
on, the feature will turn itself off. You will need to reactivate it.
Climate Controlled Seats Air Filter Replacement (If Equipped)
The climate controlled seat system includes air filters. You must replace
them periodically. See scheduled maintenance information for more
information.
There is a filter located under each front seat. You can access the filter
from the second row seat. Move the front seats all the way forward and
up to ease access.
To remove a filter:
1. Remove the key from the
ignition.
2. Press up on the outside rigid
edge of the filter and rotate
counterclockwise once the tabs are
released.
3. Remove the filter.
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Then, push in on the center of
the outside edge of the filter and
rotate up into the housing until it
clips into position.
A/C
Seats 157
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
REAR SEATS
Folding Down the Second Row 40% Seat System
WARNING: Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat
back position as the system will move forward when you lift the
release handle.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position and no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the
second row seats before folding them down.
Move the front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat head
restraint clears the front seat.
1. Lower the head restraints by
pulling on the strap.
158 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
2. Locate handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
3. Pull up on the handle and push
the seat back forward toward the
front of the vehicle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
1. Lift the seatback toward the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
3. Lift up on the head restraint until
it locks into its original position.
Seats 159
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Placing the Second Row Outboard 40% Seats in Cargo Mode
WARNING: Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat
back position as the system will move forward when you lift the
release handle.
WARNING:
Always return the seat from the kneel position prior to
raising the seatback. Failure to do so could result in personal injury.
Place the second-row seats in a kneel down load floor position to allow
more cargo space.
To place the seats in the cargo mode:
1. Fold down the second row seat.
2. Pull the cargo mode lever up to
release the seat into a kneel down
load floor position.
Returning to the upright position from full lowered load floor
position
You cannot return the seatback to the upright position until the seat is
returned from the kneel down position. To return the seat to the upright
position:
1. Push the seat rearward until the
latch is engaged.
2. Return the seatback to the
upright position.
160 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Adjusting the Second Row Outboard 40% Seat for E-Z Entry
WARNING: Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether
the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
WARNING: After using the E-Z Entry feature make sure there
are not any objects, cargo or the feet of a third row occupant
under the second row seat when latching the seat to the floor. Injury to
the third row occupants feet or damage to the seat may occur.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull on
the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
The E-Z entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the third
row seat.
To enter the third row seat:
1. Fold down the second row seat
and release the handle.
2. Pull the handle up again until the
seat releases from the floor.
3. Push the seat upward and fold it
away from the third row.
Seats 161
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
To return the seat to a seating position:
1. Push the seat down and latch to
the floor.
2. Bring the seatback to an upright
position. The seatback should lock
into position.
Note: If the seatback will not return to the upright position, tumble the
seat again and re-latch it to the floor. Be sure that cargo or other objects
are not trapped underneath the seatback.
Note: If a squeak is heard from the
latch area, the latch striker pin
should be wiped clean of dust or
debris.
Exiting the Third Row
1. Pull the strap located at the
bottom outboard of the seat back to
release the seat from the floor, and
rotate the seat up towards the front
seat.
2. Follow the directions above to
return the seat from the E-Z entry
and to the upright position.
162 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Reclining the Second-Row Outboard 40% Seatback
WARNING: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
The release handle is located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion.
Lift it to allow the seatback to be
adjusted to the desired location.
Folding the Second-Row Center 20% Seat System (If Equipped)
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety
belts, make sure that the safety belts are not buckled when
moving the seat to the load floor position.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath
the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull
on the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched
seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
1. Locate the release handle located
in the upper left seatback, and pull
the handle to release the folding
seat latch.
Seats 163
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
2. With the latch released the
seatback can be lowered into the
load floor position.
3. To return the seat to the upright
position, lift the seatback until the
latch is fully engaged.
Adjusting the Second-Row Center 20% Seat (If Equipped)
Note: Move this seat forward to keep a child in a child restraint close to
the front seat occupants. Move the seat to the full rearward position
when it is occupied by older children or adults, including children in
booster seats.
Lift the handle to move the seat
forward or backward.
164 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat
•Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear of the center console.
The heated seats only operate when the ignition is on. To operate the
heated seats:
Press the heated seat button to cycle through the various
heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
Third Row Seats
Make sure that no objects are on the floor in front of the third row seats
or on the seat cushion before lowering them. Make sure that the head
restraints are lowered and the second row seats are not reclined.
Seats 165
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Folding Down the Third Row Seats to the Load Floor
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety
belts, make sure that the safety belts are not buckled when
moving the seat to the load floor position.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seat back to its original position, pull on
the seatback to make sure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or crash.
Before folding the third row seats,
fold the head restraints down by
pulling on the strap located at the
bottom of the restraint.
Pull up on the handle located
behind the seatback while pushing
the seat back forward and down
into the seat cushion.
To return the seat back to its original position, lift the seat back until it
latches into place.
166 Seats
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PowerFold™ Third-Row Seat (If Equipped)
Note: The power fold down seats will operate for 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is in off. The transmission must be in park (P) and the
liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open. Similar to the battery saver
feature, the power third row seat will be disabled 10 minutes after
turning the vehicle off.
Note: Be sure that the head restraints are folded down before powering
the third row seat down.
The control buttons are located on
the right-hand rear quarter trim
panel (accessible from the liftgate
area).
Press B to lower the desired
seatback. Press A to return the
seatback to its original position.
If the power third row seat is disabled after 10 minutes, you can enable
the seat by:
•Opening any door.
•Pressing the unlock button on the key fob.
•Pressing any keyless entry keypad button.
•Turning the ignition key.
B
A A
B
UP
FOLD
UP
FOLD
Seats 167
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HOMELINK® WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held garage
door opener with a three-button
transmitter that is integrated into the
driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary
features, a garage door opener and a
platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as being
programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry
door locks, and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found online at www.homelink.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
168
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the garage and your key in the
ignition, turn the key so that the ignition is in the on position.
2. Hold your hand-held, garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters)
away from the HomeLink button you want
to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you programmed for five
seconds, then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the
door. If your garage door does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the programming is complete. Press and
release the programmed HomeLink button, and then begin programming
your garage door opener. See below for Steps5–7.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, the HomeLink button is not programmed yet. Do the
following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the
hand-held transmitter button every two seconds. The HomeLink
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink
function button recognizes and accepts the hand-held transmitter’s radio
frequency signal.
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
169
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
After programming the HomeLink button, follow Steps5–7aslisted
below to program your garage door opener.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the unit
and you may need to remove the cover or
lamp lens on your garage door opener.
5. Press the learn button on the garage door
opener motor, and then you have 30 seconds
to complete the next step.
6. Return to your car.
7. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for two seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps1–4.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights above
the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
170
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Programming HomeLink to a Genie Intellicode 2 garage door opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter must already be programmed
to operate with the garage door opener.
Programing the transmitters
To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode. To do this:
A. Red LED
B. Green LED
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for
10 seconds. The LED light will change from green to green and red.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming
mode. If done properly the LED light will appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) of the
button on the sun visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program. The
indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If
HomeLink does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter will
need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter LED displays green
and red, release the button until the LED turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed successfully, the Genie
transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change
from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly
the LED will turn green.
BA
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
171
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Programming HomeLink to the Genie Intellicode garage door
opener motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor.
To program HomeLink to the garage
door opener motor:
1. Press and hold the PROGRAM
button on the garage door opener
motor until both blue LED’s turn on.
2. Release the PROGRAM button.
Only the smaller round LED should
be on.
3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple LED will flash
Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s
previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door
opener motor unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for
two seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink device
To erase programming from the three HomeLink buttons, press and hold
the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash.
The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time both
buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and the
LED should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any
one of the three HomeLink buttons is pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
172
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
•Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
•Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
•On the instrument panel.
•In the console bin.
•On the rear of the center console.
•On the right rear quarter panel.
Auxiliary Power Points 173
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power
point whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat
the safety protection design. Doing so may cause the power point to
overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the
150–watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The cap should always be closed whenever the power point outlet
is not in use.
Note: The power point will turn off after 13 minutes if the ignition is on
without the engine running. Keep the engine running to use the power
point.
The 110–volt AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical
devices that require up to 150 watts. Exceeding the 150–watt limit will
cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide
overload protection.
The power point is located on the
back of the center console.
The power point is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
•Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions
•Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
•Measuring devices that process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
•Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
174 Auxiliary Power Points
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated or shorted. Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then
on for overloading and shorting conditions. Let the system cool off, then
turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition.
The power point can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the
indicator light is on. The indicator light is located in the top left corner
of the power point.
When the indicator light is:
•on — power point is ready to supply power
•off — power point power supply is off; ignition is not on
•blinking — power point is in fault mode
Auxiliary Power Points 175
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during
hard braking, acceleration or collisions, including hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
A. Cupholders
B. Utility compartment, coin holder
slots, tissue box holder, audio input
jack and USB port
C. Power point, rear climate
controls, rear audio controls, rear
heated seat controls and 110-volt
AC power point
D. Rear cupholders
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your
option package.
Press near the rear edge of the door
to open it.
ASHTRAY (IF EQUIPPED)
The ashtray and cupholders are
located on the instrument panel.
To open the ashtray, push on the
door to release the assembly, then
pull it out fully. To close, push the
assembly in completely and release.
A
B
C
D
176 Storage Compartments
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
or radio noise.
Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine. If you have
difficulty starting the engine, see Failure to start later in this section.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 177
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
IGNITION SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Off: The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not
leave your key in the ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to
lose charge.
B. Accessory: Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to
operate while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long. This
could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge.
C. On: All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
D. Start: Cranks the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The keyless starting system may not function if the key is close to
metal objects or electronic devices such as cellular phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside your vehicle to switch the
ignition on and start the engine.
Note: When locking your vehicle, any remote controls left inside the
vehicle may become disabled. A message may appear in the information
display indicating that there is no key detected if you try to start the
engine. Press the unlock button on the remote control to enable it, and
then start the engine.
C
D
B
A
178 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Ignition Modes
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or when the engine is running
but the vehicle is not in motion.
Accessory: Allows some electrical accessories to operate while the
engine is not running.
•Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button twice.
On: All electrical circuits are operational. Warning lamps and indicators
are illuminated.
•Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button once
from accessory mode.
•Without applying the brake pedal, press and release the button twice
from off mode.
Start: Starts the engine.
•Press the brake pedal, and then press the button for any length of
time. An indicator light on the button illuminates when then ignition
is on and when the engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed increases, this helps to warm
up the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
Note:
You can crank the engine for a total of 60 seconds (without the
engine starting) before the starting system temporarily disables. The
60 seconds does not have to be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time, without the engine starting,
you reached the 60-second time limit. A message appears in the
information display alerting you that you exceeded the cranking time. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at least 15 minutes. After
15 minutes, you are limited to a 15-second engine cranking time. You need
to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 179
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Before starting the engine check the following:
•Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts.
•Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
•Make sure the parking brake is on.
•Make sure the gearshift is in position P.
•Turn the ignition key to the on position. If your vehicle is equipped
with a keyless ignition, see the following instructions.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position. Release the key when the engine
starts.
Note: The engine may continue cranking for up to 15 seconds or until it
starts.
Note: If you cannot start the engine on the first try, wait for a short
period and try again.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
•The key frequencies are jammed.
•The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the following:
1. Locate the key backup slot in the
center console utility
compartment.
2. With the buttons facing the front
passenger and the key ring at the
rear of the console, place the key
into backup slot.
3. With the key in this position,
press the brake pedal, then the
button to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
180 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fast Restart (Vehicles with Keyless Start)
The fast restart feature allows you to restart the engine within
20 seconds of switching it off, even if a valid key is not present.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine off, press the brake pedal and
press the button. After 20 seconds have expired, you can no longer start
the engine without the key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains running until you press the button,
even if the system does not detect a valid key. If you open and close a door
while the engine is running, the system searches for a valid key. You cannot
start the engine if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Stationary
1. Move the transmission selector lever to position P.
2. If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the key to the off position. If
your vehicle has a keyless start system, press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all electrical circuits, warning lamps
and indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes, the ignition and engine
automatically shut down.
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle Is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine when the vehicle is still
moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will be required. When the
ignition is switched off, some electrical circuits, including air bags,
warning lamps and indicators may also be off. If the ignition was turned
off accidentally, you can shift into Neutral and restart the engine.
1. If your vehicle has an ignition key, move the transmission
selector lever to position Nand use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission
selector lever to position Pand turn the key to the off position.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 181
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
2. If your vehicle has a keyless start system, move the transmission
selector lever to position Nand use the brakes to bring your vehicle
to a safe stop. When your vehicle has stopped, move the transmission
selector lever to position Pand switch the ignition off by pressing
and holding the button for one second, or pressing it three times
within two seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Your vehicle may have remote start capability. Refer to Remote start in
the Keys and Remote Control chapter.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
•Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters).
•Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120–volt A/C
electrical source.
182 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
•Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This
extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
•Use as short an extension cord as possible.
•Do not use multiple extension cords.
•Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
•Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of
combustibles.
•Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
•Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
•Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
•Keep plug terminals clean and free of dirt and corrosion.
•Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry before use. To
clean them, use a dry cloth.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer
than three hours does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 183
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity. This can cause a fire if you are filling
an ungrounded container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle from its full
inserted position when refueling.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
•Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
•Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
184 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel, such as
gasoline, is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
•Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
•Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
•Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
•
Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or
skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals,
serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the
skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage and a loss of vehicle performance; repairs may not be
covered under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel (Gasoline Vehicles)
Use only UNLEADED gasoline or UNLEADED gasoline blended with a
maximum of 15% ethanol in your gasoline vehicle. If your vehicle is a
Flex Fuel Vehicle (FFV), it will have a yellow bezel placed over the fuel
fill inlet.
Do not use:
•Fuels containing more than 15% ethanol or E-85 fuel.
•Fuels containing methanol.
•Fuels containing metallic based additives, including manganese-based
compounds.
Fuel and Refueling 185
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Fuels containing the octane booster additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
•Leaded-fuel (The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law).
Note: Use of any fuel other than recommended fuel can cause
powertrain damage, impair the emission control system or cause loss of
vehicle performance. Any damage to the vehicle that is caused by the
use of fuel not recommended will not be covered under warranty.
Octane Recommendations
Regular unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87
is recommended. Some stations
offer fuels posted as Regular with
an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are
not recommended. Premium fuel will provide improved performance and
is recommended for severe duty usage such as trailer tow.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
•You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
•Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
•The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
See Settings in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on
calculating DTE (Distance to empty).
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
186 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel® system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the
ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel®
system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
With the Easy Fuel® “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
1. The white plastic funnel is located under the
spare tire tool panel located in the floor
compartment behind the rear seat.
2. Unlatch and remove the spare tire tool panel. Remove the white
plastic funnel.
3. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
5. Clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels can be
purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the
funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work and can
damage the Easy Fuel system. The included funnel has been specially
designed to work safely with your vehicle.
Fuel and Refueling 187
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
•Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island.
•Turn off your engine when you are refueling.
•Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
•Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
•Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places.
•Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
•Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling after the fuel pump nozzle
automatically shuts off for the second time. Failure to follow this
will fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
Note: Wait at least 10 seconds before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
•Place approved fuel container on the ground.
•DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
•Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
•DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
188 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Easy Fuel® “No Cap” Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel door by pulling the indent on the door.
3. Insert the fuel plug key (if equipped) into the locking plug and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping.
5. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
6. Reinstall the plug (if equipped) into the fuel fill inlet and turn the key
clockwise to lock.
Note: Do not overfill the tank or fuel spillage will occur.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the information display. See the Information
Displays chapter for more information.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel
fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the
vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to
close properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing
to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to
turn on as well.
Fuel and Refueling 189
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the Tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
•Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
•Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
•Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers)
of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2000 miles–3000 miles (3200
kilometers–4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or
fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
190 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
•Use only the specified fuel listed.
•Avoid running out of fuel.
•Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
•Have the items listed in Scheduled Maintenance Information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in Scheduled Maintenance
Information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft® or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Fuel and Refueling 191
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty
information.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel®
No Cap Fuel System in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine start-up followed by mixed city or highway
driving. No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and can lead to more costly repairs.
192 Fuel and Refueling
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state, provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. See On-board
Diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway or highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once the
engine is started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle
is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above
driving cycle will have to be repeated.
Fuel and Refueling 193
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the off
position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the tow/haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the engine is turned off, the shift data
which includes the adaptive information will be stored automatically in
the Powertrain Control Module. If the battery if disconnected for any
reason, the stored information from the last time the key was turned to
off will be read. This way, no information will be lost with any battery
removal or disconnect.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
•Press the brake pedal
•Start the engine
•Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear. If your vehicle is
equipped with a floor-shift transmission, press the gearshift lever
release button (on the front of the lever) while shifting into the
desired gear.
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
•Come to a complete stop
•Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
T/H
P
R
N
D
M
2
1
+
-
T/H
+
-
194 Transmission
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive) with Tow/Haul Off
The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through six.
D (Drive) with Tow/Haul On
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
Tow/Haul can be activated by pressing the transmission control switch on
the end of the gearshift lever (column-shift transmission) or on the side
of the gearshift lever (floor-shift transmission).
•Column-shift transmission
•Floor-shift transmission
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
TOW/HAUL
T/H
T/H
P
R
N
D
M
2
1
+
-
+
-
Transmission 195
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Tow/haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Drive) position; this engine braking will slow
the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is pressed.
To deactivate the tow/haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated. Tow/haul will also deactivate when the
vehicle is powered down.
3 (Third)
Transmission operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads.
2 (Second)
Transmission operates in 2nd gear only.
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads.
1 (First)
•Transmission operates in 1st gear only.
•Provides maximum engine braking.
•Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
•Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
•Allowed in D (Drive) only.
•Press the accelerator to the floor.
•Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
196 Transmission
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Understanding your SelectShift Automatic® transmission
This vehicle may be equipped with a SelectShift Automatic™
transmission (SST) gearshift lever. The SST is an automatic transmission
with the ability for the driver to change gears up or down (without a
clutch) as desired. The SST feature has two modes: PRS and M mode.
M (Manual)
Moving the gearshift lever from drive position D (Drive) to M (Manual)
gives you the ability to manually change gears. The current gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Press the (+)/(–) buttons on the gearshift lever to manually make shifts:
•Press (+) on the gearshift lever
button to manually upshift the
transmission.
•Press (–) on the gearshift lever
button to manually downshift the
transmission.
For vehicles equipped with the (+)/(–) buttons on the column shifter:
•Press (+) on the column shifter
button to manually upshift the
transmission.
•Press (–) on the column shifter
button to manually downshift the
transmission.
When manual control is no longer desired, return the transmission to the
D (Drive) position.
The transmission will operate in gears one through six.
T/H
T/H
P
R
N
D
M
2
1
+
-
+
-
TOW/HAUL
Transmission 197
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Recommended shift speeds:
Upshifts when accelerating
Shift from:
1 – 2 15 mph (24 km/h)
2 – 3 25 mph (40 km/h)
3 – 4 40 mph (64 km/h)
4 – 5 45 mph (72 km/h)
5 – 6 50 mph (80 km/h)
In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM, which
may cause it to stall, the SST will still automatically make some
downshifts if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time.
Although the SST will make some downshifts for you, it will still allow
you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the
engine will not be damaged from over-revving.
The SST will not automatically upshift, even if the engine is approaching
the RPM limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing the + button.
Engine damage may occur if excessive engine revving is held without shifting.
PRS (Progressive Range Selection)
With the gearshift lever in D (Drive), press the – button to active PRS.
The available and selected gears will be indicated on the instrument
cluster.
All available gears will be displayed with the current gear indicated.
Press the – button again to lock out gears beginning with the highest
gear. Example: press the – button twice to lock out 6th and 5th gears.
Only the available gears will be displayed and the transmission will
automatically shift between the available gears. Press the + button to
unlock gears to allow the transmission to shift to higher gears. The
transmission will shift automatically within the gear range you select.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal
and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
198 Transmission
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Brake-shift interlock
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the 3 (on) position and the brake pedal is not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
the Fuses chapter.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake. Turn the ignition key to 1 (off), then remove
the key.
2. Move the steering column to the full down and full rearward position
(toward the driver’s seat).
3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.
4. Place fingers into hole where the gearshift lever boot was removed
from and pull top half of shroud up and forward to separate it from the
lower half of the shroud. There is a hinge at the forward edge of the top
shroud. Roll the top half of the shroud upward on the hinge point to
clear the hazard flasher button, then pull straight rearward toward the
driver’s seat to remove.
5. Remove the top half of the shroud.
Transmission 199
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
6. Remove the three fasteners
under the column that secure the
lower shroud half to the column.
7. Pull the lock lever into the full
unlocked position and remove the
lower shroud cover by pulling the
lever handle through the slot in the
cover.
8. Apply the brake and move the gearshift lever into N (Neutral).
9. Start the vehicle.
Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order, making sure to engage the
hinge pivots between the upper and lower halves of the shroud. Keep
slight pressure in the forward direction as the halves are rotated
together.
Brake-Shift Interlock – Floor-Shifter Assembly
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brakelamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
200 Transmission
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
the Fuses chapter for more information.
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition key to the off position, and
remove the key.
2. Starting at the rear of the trim
panel, using a screwdriver (or
similar tool) carefully pry up the
trim panel from rear attachments
and disconnect it from the console
to expose the inside of the
gearshift.
3. Locate the brake shift interlock
lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
4. Apply the brake pedal. Using a
screwdriver (or similar tool), press
and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift lever
out of the P (Park) position and into
the N (Neutral) position.
5. Install the trim panel.
6. Apply brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking brake.
See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used.
Transmission 201
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
202 Transmission
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED )
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see General Information in the Wheels
and Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive
components. 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
Note: If 4X4 low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph
(5 km/h), the 4WD system will not perform a shift. This is normal and
should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4X4
Low) for proper operation.
4WD Indicator Lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the
reconfigurable telltale (RTT) location under the following conditions.
Refer to Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system will typically
remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition
occurring. It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this
warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
4X2 - Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected.
4X4 AUTO - Continuously illuminates when 4A is selected
4X4 - Continuously illuminates when 4H is selected.
4X4 LOW - Continuously illuminates when 4L is selected.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 203
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4WD switch positions
WARNING: Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac® with RSC®, the
system will automatically turn off the stability enhancement feature
when you shift the 4WD system into 4L (4X4 LOW). You can manually
turn the system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac button, see the
Traction Control chapter for more information. This will disable the
engine management feature, allowing the vehicle to maintain full power
and enhanced momentum through the obstacle. The brake traction
enhancement feature will still be enabled.
Note: The Control Trac® selector knob should not be changed while the
rear wheels are slipping.
The Control Trac® 4WD system functions in
four modes:
•2H (4X2) delivers power to the rear wheels
only. The message center will momentarily
display 4x2 when this mode is selected. This
mode is appropriate for normal on-road
driving on dry pavement and provides best
fuel economy.
•4A (4X4 AUTO) provides electronic control
four-wheel drive with power delivered to all
four wheels, as required, for increased traction. The message center
will display “4X4 AUTO” when this mode is selected. This mode is
appropriate for all on-road driving conditions, such as dry road
surfaces, wet pavement, snow or gravel.
•4H (4X4) provides electronically locked four-wheel drive power to
front and rear wheels. The message center will display 4X4 when this
mode is selected. This mode is not recommended for use on dry
pavement. This mode is only intended for severe winter or off-road
conditions, such as deep snow, ice or shallow sand.
204 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•4L (4X4 LOW) provides electronically locked four-wheel drive when
extra power at reduced speeds is required. The message center will
display 4X4 LOW when this mode is selected. This mode is not
recommended for use on dry pavement. Use this mode for off-road
low-speed operation or when extra power is required, such as climbing
steep grades, going through deep sand or pulling a boat out of the
water.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Do not perform these operations if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages.
You can move the control from 2H, 4A or 4H at a stop or while driving.
The information display may display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is
in progress. Once the shift is complete the information display will then
display the system mode selected.
Shifting to/from 4L (4X4 LOW)
1. Bring the vehicle to a rolling speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
2. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
3. Move the 4WD control to the desired mode.
The message center will display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. The message center will then display the system mode
selected.
If any of the above shift conditions are not met, the shift will not occur
and the message center will display information guiding the driver
through the proper range of shifting procedures.
If SHIFT DELAYED PULL FORWARD is displayed in the message
center, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. To alleviate this
condition, place the transmission in a forward gear, move the vehicle
forward approximately 5 feet (2 meters), and shift the transmission back
to neutral to allow the transfer case to complete the range shift.
Note: 4x4 low mode is not intended for use on dry pavement
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 205
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles
Note: On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to
four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary
clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to
speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for
concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a front air dam that can
become damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your
vehicle off-road. This air dam can be taken off by removing two bolts.
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
206 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in this chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be
found in the Maintenance chapter. You should become thoroughly
familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle.
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles In Special Conditions
•Do not use 4H or 4L on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive
components. 4H or 4L modes are only intended for consistently
slippery or loose surfaces.
•Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
•Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
•If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
•It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
•It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 207
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to
the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency maneuvers
•In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle, i.e., turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not
more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake
pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called
for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a
safe direction of travel.
•In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
•If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
208 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Mud and water
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations and
responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service
and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve
our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills.
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. . A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 209
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be able to steer. The front wheels have to
be turning in order to steer the vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
pump the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
210 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not
pump the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS).
Maintenance and modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 211
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn out. Have them inspected by an authorized dealer. If your vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have your vehicle inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel
cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to park
(P) and apply the parking brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal and the
area around it for any items or debris that may be obstructing its
movement. If none are found and the condition persists, have your
vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates when you turn the ignition
on. If the light does not illuminate during start-up, remains on
or flashes, the anti-lock brake system may be disabled. Have
the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still effective.
If the brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
212 Brakes
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when:
•You drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
•Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
•You take corners too fast.
•The road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the transmission is securely latched in park (P).
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The brake warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until
the parking brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The hill start assist feature does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave the vehicle, always apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into park (P).
WARNING: You must remain in the vehicle once you have
activated the hill start assist feature.
WARNING: During all times, you are responsible for controlling
the vehicle, supervising the hill start assist system and
intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the engine is revved excessively, or if a
malfunction is detected when the hill start assist feature is active,
the hill start assist feature will be deactivated.
Brakes 213
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Hill start assist keeps your vehicle stationary long enough to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal when your vehicle is
on a slope.
The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed
sufficient drive to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a slope, (for example from a car
park ramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space).
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring the vehicle to a complete standstill.
Keep the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle is on a slope, the hill start assist
feature will be activated automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal, the vehicle will
remain on the slope without rolling away for approximately two or three
seconds. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the
process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The brakes will be released
automatically.
214 Brakes
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations (for example, stuck in snow or mud), turning the
traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin
with full engine power.
Turn the traction control system off by pressing the
stability control button located on the center of the
instrument panel.
System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the traction
control system, the stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the traction control system was not manually disabled using
the stability control button. If the stability control light still illuminates
steadily, have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Operating your vehicle with traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the traction control system is
turned off or if a problem occurs in the stability system.
Traction Control 215
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction or wheel and tire size may change the handling
characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance
of the AdvanceTrac® system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac®
system. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible
from the front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order
to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac® sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac® system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac® system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If
your AdvanceTrac® system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ system helps you keep
control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. The electronic
stability control portion of the system helps avoid skids and lateral slides
and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover. The traction
control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction. See the
Traction Control chapter for details on traction control system
operation.
216 Stability Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AVehicle without AdvanceTrac with
RSC skidding off its intended route.
BVehicle with AdvanceTrac with
RSC maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac®With RSC™
The system automatically activates when you start your engine. You can
turn off the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions
of the system below 35 mph (56 km/h). When the transmission is in
reverse (R), they are disabled. You can turn off the traction control
portion of the system independently. See the Traction Control chapter.
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Button
functions
Stability
control
OFF light
Roll
stability
control
Electronic
stability
control
Traction
control
system
Default at
start-up
Illuminated
during bulb
check
Enabled Enabled Enabled
Button pressed
momentarily
Illuminated
solid Enabled Enabled
1
Disabled
1
Stability Control 217
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AdvanceTrac with RSC Features
Button
functions
Stability
control
OFF light
Roll
stability
control
Electronic
stability
control
Traction
control
system
Button pressed
and held for
more than
5 seconds at
vehicle speed
under 35 mph
(56 km/h)
Flashes then
illuminated
solid
2
Disabled Disabled Disabled
4
Vehicle speed
exceeds
35 mph
(56 km/h)
after button is
pressed and
held for more
than 5 seconds
Illuminated
solid Enabled Enabled
1
Disabled
1
Button pressed
again after
deactivation
Not
illuminated Enabled Enabled Enabled
Transfer case
switched to
4WD Low
Locked
3
Illuminated Disabled Disabled Disabled
4
1
Traction control system could be enabled but with higher entry
thresholds compared to full system. Electronic stability control entry
thresholds are higher compared to full system.
2
Lamp light starts blinking for three seconds after entering press and
hold state.
3
Control switch is not pressed. Stability control light turned on when
4WD low locked transfer case mode selected.
4
Engine traction control and two-wheel spin brake traction control
functions are disabled. Single wheel spin traction control is always
enabled.
218 Stability Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HILL DESCENT CONTROL™ (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Hill descent control cannot control descent in all
surface conditions and circumstances, such as ice or extremely
steep grades. Hill descent control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver. Failure to do so may result
in loss of vehicle control, crash or serious injury.
WARNING: Hill descent control does not provide hill hold at
zero mph (0 km/h). When stopped, the parking brake must be
applied and/or the vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it may roll
away.
Hill descent control allows the driver to set and maintain vehicle speed
while descending steep grades in various surface conditions.
Hill descent control can maintain vehicle speeds on downhill grades
between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system remains armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling down interval after a period of
sustained use. The amount of time that the feature can remain active
before cooling varies with conditions. The system will provide a warning
in the message center and a chime will sound when the system is about
to disengage for cooling. At this time, manually apply the brakes as
needed to maintain descent speed.
To enable hill descent control and set the descent speed, do the
following:
1. Press and release the hill descent button located in the
center of the terrain management control. A light in the
control will illuminate and chime will sound when this feature
is activated.
2. To increase descent speed, press the accelerator pedal until the
desired speed is reached. To decrease descent speed, press the brake
pedal until the desired speed is reached.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once the desired descent speed is
reached, remove your feet from the pedals and the chosen vehicle speed
will be maintained.
Terrain Response 219
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: Noise from the ABS pump motor may be observed during hill
descent control operation. This is a normal characteristic of the ABS and
should be no reason for concern.
Hill descent modes
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC button is pressed
and HDC is active, HILL DESCENT CONTROL ACTIVE will appear in
the message center for several seconds.
•At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC button is pressed
and conditions are not correct for hill descent activation, the HDC
system will be enabled, the light on the button will be on solid and
HILL DESCENT CONTROL READY will be displayed in the message
center for several seconds.
•At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h): When the HDC button is pressed,
the HDC system will be enabled, the light on the button will be
illuminated, and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20 MPH OR LESS will be
displayed in the message center for several seconds.
•For HDC to enable, the vehicle must be in a drive gear or (R)
Reverse. If the vehicle is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the HDC
button is pressed, FOR HILL CNTRL, SELECT GEAR will be displayed
in the message center for several seconds.
Refer to Warning lamps and indicators in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for hill descent control messages.
220 Terrain Response
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the
system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey®, it is possible to prevent
turning the sensing system off. Refer to the MyKey® chapter.
Note: When a trailer is connect to your vehicle, the Rear Sensing System
may detect the trailer and provide warnings. It is suggested that the
driver disables the Rear Sensing System when a trailer is connected to
your vehicle to prevent these warnings.
Parking Aids 221
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
Using the Front and Rear Sensing System
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible
warning increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or
receding object is detected farther than 10 inches (25 centimeters) from
the side of the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R
(Reverse):
•and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
•but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
•and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
A
222 Parking Aids
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the gearshift is in any position other
than P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h).
A. Coverage area of up to 27 inches
(70 centimeters) from the front of
the vehicle and about 6–9 inches
(15–23 centimeters) to the side of
the front end of the vehicle. Refer
to the reverse sensing section for
details on coverage area.
The system sounds an audible warning when obstacles are near either
bumper in the following manner:
•Objects detected by the front sensors are indicated by a high-pitched
tone from the front of the vehicle.
•Objects detected by the rear sensors are indicated by a lower pitched
tone from the rear of the vehicle.
•The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest to the front
or rear of the vehicle. For example, if an obstacle is 12 inches (30
centimeters) from the front of the vehicle and, at the same time, an
obstacle is only 6 inches (15 centimeters) from the rear of the vehicle,
the lower pitched tone sounds.
•An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are
objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 inches (25
centimeters).
For specific information on the reverse sensing portion of the system,
refer to that section.
A
Parking Aids 223
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and
the liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when the liftgate is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle. The image will be displayed in either the rear view mirror or
the display in the center of the instrument panel.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the
liftgate.
224 Parking Aids
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses two types of
guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle:
1. Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line, which can be helpful when backing into a
parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the
vehicle.
2. Centerline: Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object (i.e. a
trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the luggage compartment
is ajar, no rear view camera features are displayed.
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R
(Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
Note: The default setting for the camera delay is off. Press the Settings
button found on the navigation screen (if equipped) to set the camera
delay feature to on or off.
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
•Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not
operating.
•The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
•The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
To access any of the rear view camera system settings, make the
following selections in the touch screen when the transmission is not in
R (Reverse):
Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera.
After changing a system setting, the touch screen shows a preview of the
selected features.
Parking Aids 225
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed guidelines are on.
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
E. Centerline
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror
to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph
(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green highlights which appear on top of
the video image when an object is detected by the reverse sensing
system. The alert highlights the closest object detected. The reverse
sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled,
highlighted areas are still displayed.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF.
A
E
D
C
B
226 Parking Aids
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is on, the full area behind the
vehicle is not shown. Be aware of your surroundings when using
the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: When manual zoom is enabled, only the centerline is shown.
Allows the driver to get a closer view of an object behind the vehicle.
The zoomed image keeps the bumper in the image to provide a
reference. The zoom is only active while the transmission is in R
(Reverse), When the transmission is shifted out of R (Reverse), the
feature automatically turns off and must be reset when it is used again.
Selectable settings for this feature are OFF and ON. Press the zoom
button to change the view. The default setting for the manual zoom is
OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear
other than P (Park), the camera image remains in the display until your
vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This occurs when the rear
camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting
for the rear camera delay is OFF.
Parking Aids 227
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic, on
winding roads or when the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
WARNING: When you are going downhill, your vehicle speed
may increase above the set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear to assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
Type One
228 Cruise Control
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Type Two
Switching On Cruise Control
The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.
Press and release ON.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator will turn on in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
•Press and hold SET+ or SET–. Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
•Press and release SET+ or SET–. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
•Press the accelerator pedal or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET+.
Canceling a Set Speed
Tap the brake pedal. The set speed will not be erased.
Resuming a Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Off Cruise Control
Note: The set speed is erased when you turn off cruise control.
Press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Cruise Control 229
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM (BLIS®) WITH CROSS
TRAFFIC ALERT (CTA) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS® as a
replacement for using the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS® is not a
replacement for careful driving.
BLIS® aids the driver in detecting
vehicles that may have entered the
blind spot zone (A). The detection
area is on both sides of the vehicle,
extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately
10 feet (3 meters) beyond the
bumper. The system alerts you if
certain vehicles enter the blind spot
zone while driving.
CTA warns the driver of vehicles approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: BLIS® is not designed to prevent contact with other vehicles or
objects; or to detect parked vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure
(fences, guardrails, trees, etc.). It is designed to alert the driver to
vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through the blind zone (typically
fewer than two seconds), the system does not trigger.
230 Driving Aids
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Using the Systems
BLIS® turns on when the engine is started and the vehicle is driven
forward above 3 mph (5 km/h); it remains on while the transmission is in
D (Drive) or N (Neutral). If shifted out of D (Drive) or N (Neutral), the
system enters CTA mode. Once shifted back into D (Drive), BLIS® turns
back on when the vehicle is driven above 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: BLIS® does not function in R (Reverse) or P (Park) or provide
any additional warning when a turn signal is on.
CTA detects approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet (14 meters) away
though coverage decreases when the sensors are blocked. Reversing
slowly helps increase the coverage area and effectiveness.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, NEVER use the CTA
system as a replacement for using the interior and exterior
mirrors and looking over your shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. CTA is not a replacement for careful driving.
In this first example, the left sensor is only partially obstructed; zone
coverage is nearly maximized.
Driving Aids 231
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Zone coverage also decreases when parking at shallow angles. Here, the
left sensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that side is severely
limited.
System Lights and Messages
The BLIS® and CTA systems
illuminate a yellow alert indicator in
the outside mirror on the side of
the vehicle the approaching vehicle
is coming from.
Note: The alert indicator dims when nighttime darkness is detected.
CTA also sounds an audible alarm and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
CTA works with the reverse sensing system which sounds its own
audible alarm; see the Parking Aids chapter.
232 Driving Aids
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
System Sensors
WARNING: Just prior to the system recognizing a blocked
condition and alerting the driver, the number of missed objects
will increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the BLIS® as a
replacement for using the side and rear view mirrors and looking over
your shoulder before changing lanes. BLIS® is not a replacement for
careful driving.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning with no blockage present;
this is rare and known as a false blockage warning. A false blocked
condition either self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
The system uses radar sensors
which are located behind the
bumper fascia on each side of the
vehicle. Do not allow these areas to
become obstructed by mud, snow or
bumper stickers, as this can cause
degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded performance condition, a blocked
sensor warning or low visibility warning will appear in the information
display and the alert indicator illuminates in the appropriate mirror(s).
The information display warning can be cleared but the alert indicator
remains illuminated.
When the blockage is removed, the system can be reset in two ways: 1)
when at least two objects are detected while driving, or 2) turn the
ignition key from on to off, then back on. If the blockage is still present
after the key cycle, the system senses again that it is blocked after
driving in traffic.
Reasons for messages being displayed
The radar surface is
dirty or obstructed
Clean the fascia area in front of the radar or
remove the obstruction.
The radar surface is
not dirty or obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for a few minutes to
allow the radar to detect passing vehicles so it
can clear the blocked state.
Driving Aids 233
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Reasons for messages being displayed
Heavy rainfall/snowfall
interferes with the
radar signals
No action required. The system automatically
resets to an unblocked state once the
rainfall/snowfall rate decreases or stops. Do
not use BLIS® and/or CTA in these conditions.
System Limitations
The BLIS® and CTA systems do have their limitations; situations such as
severe weather conditions or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may limit the BLIS®:
•Certain maneuvering of vehicles entering and exiting the blind zone.
•Vehicles passing through the blind zone at very fast rates.
•When several vehicles forming a convoy pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may limit the CTA system:
•Adjacently parked vehicles or objects obstructing the sensors.
•Approaching vehicles passing at speeds greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h).
•Driving in reverse faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
•Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If you connected a trailer to your vehicle the BLIS® system may
detect the trailer causing a false alert. To avoid false alerts you may want
to turn the BLIS off manually.
There may be certain instances when either the BLIS® or CTA systems
illuminate the alert indicator with no vehicle in the coverage zone; this is
known as a false alert. Some amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the left or right sensor, the
BLIS® indicator in the information display will illuminate and remain on.
Also, BLIND SPOT SYSTEM FAULT or CROSS TRAFFIC SYSTEM
FAULT message will appear. When problems that may cause the left or
right indicator not to illuminate, only the information display message
faults appear.
234 Driving Aids
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Switching the Systems Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off temporarily by using the
information display control; refer to the Information Display chapter.
When you switch off the Blind Spot Information System, you will not
receive alerts and the information display will display a system off
message. The yellow alert indicator in the outside mirror will also flash
twice. The system switches back on whenever you switch the ignition on.
You can also have one or both systems switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off, the system can only be switched
back on at an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation. When a system error is detected a steering message will
appear in the information display.
WARNING: The electric power steering system has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system to ensure proper
operation of the electronic system. When an electronic error is
detected, a message will be displayed in the information display. If this
happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the engine. After
at least 10 seconds, reset the system by restarting the engine, and
watch the information display for a steering message. If a steering
message returns, or returns while driving, take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
WARNING: Obtain immediate service if a system error is
detected. You may not notice any difference in the feel of your
steering, but a serious condition may exist. Failure to do so may result
in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power-assisted steering system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the
ignition is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes
more effort. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes
Driving Aids 235
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering system. If this should occur, you will
neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause
permanent damage. Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the
system to cool and steering assist will return to normal.
When a steering system error is detected, steering messages may appear
in the information display.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
•an improperly inflated tire
•uneven tire wear
•loose or worn suspension components
•loose or worn steering components
•improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
AUTO LEVELING SUSPENSION SYSTEM (if equipped)
The automatic leveling suspension system is designed to improve ride,
handling and general vehicle performance during:
•Certain road conditions
•Steering maneuvers
•Braking
•Acceleration
•Towing
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level through a
hydraulic pump inside each rear shock. Depending on the payload or
road surface conditions it will take approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) for
the leveling to complete.
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately 12 hours, the
leveling system may bleed down to a lower height. This can be especially
apparent if a trailer is left attached to the parked vehicle for long periods
of time. You must drive your vehicle in order to re-level the suspension.
If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, your vehicle should be drive
approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) with the trailer prior to adjusting
(leveling) the hitch.
236 Driving Aids
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS
WARNING: When loading the roof rail crossbars, it is
recommended to evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a
low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Note: The maximum recommended load is 200 pounds (90 kilograms),
evenly distributed on the crossbars.
Note: Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel. The roof
panel is not designed to directly carry a load.
For proper function of the roof rack system, loads must be placed
directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. Your vehicle may
be equipped with factory-installed crossbars. Ford Genuine Accessory
crossbars, designed specifically for your vehicle, are also recommended
for use with your roof rack system.
Make sure that the load is securely fastened. Check the tightness of the
load before driving and at each fuel stop.
Adjusting the Crossbars (If Equipped)
1. Loosen the thumbwheels at both ends of the
crossbar by turning them counterclockwise (both
crossbars are adjustable).
2. Slide the crossbar to the desired location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheels at both ends of the
crossbar by turning them clockwise.
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time a load is
added or removed from the roof rack, and periodically while traveling.
Make sure that the load is secure before traveling.
Load Carrying 237
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
238 Load Carrying
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
Load Carrying 239
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide provided by your authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
240 Load Carrying
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
Load Carrying 241
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
242 Load Carrying
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
•Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to
carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends
average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately
30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5
x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load
capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags.
In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x 99 kg) - (5 x
13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
•Suppose your vehicle has a 1400 lb. (635 kg) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from
the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been
planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with
the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags
of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement
to your home? If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the
Load Carrying 243
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry
that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg -
(2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kg. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove
3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
A storage compartment is located in
the floor of the rear cargo area.
Lift up on the handle to open the
cover.
To close, lower the cover and press
down on the handle until the latch
clicks.
244 Load Carrying
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Cargo Shelf and Divider (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not load any objects on the shelf that may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of the vehicle in the case
of a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING: Do not place people or pets on or under the parcel
shelf.
Note: Do not put more than 30 pounds (14 kilograms) on the shelf.
The cargo shelf and divider is located behind the rear seat of your
vehicle and has two positions:
•A flat shelf which pivots up and snaps into place.
•A divider which pivots up and snaps vertically into place.
To move the shelf to the shelf
position: Pull up and pivot the
shelf over the channels on the side
trim panels and snap the shelf ends
in the channels.
To move the shelf to the divider
position: Pull up and pivot the
shelf over the channels on the side
trim panels and snap vertically in
place.
Load Carrying 245
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may
occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Be sure that the
running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running boards will resume normal
function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing
any object under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the
extended running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies,
running board motors, or the running board under body mounts to lift
the vehicle when jacking. Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures.
Debris such as mud, dirt and salt may become trapped in the running
board mechanism, possibly leading to unwanted noise. If this occurs,
manually set the running boards to the deployed position and flush the
system (in particular the front and rear hinge arms) with a high-pressure
car wash wand.
The running boards automatically
move when the doors are opened to
assist entering and exiting the
vehicle.
246 Load Carrying
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Automatic Power Deploy
The running boards will extend down and out when the doors are opened.
Automatic Power Stow
The running boards will return to the stowed position after a two second
delay when the doors are closed.
Manual Power Deploy
To manually operate the running boards, refer to the Information
Displays chapter.
•This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed
(OUT) position for access to the roof.
•When running boards are manually set in the deployed position, they
will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enable and Disable
To enable and disable the power running board feature, refer to the
Information Displays chapter.
•When this feature is disabled (OFF), the running boards will move to
the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors.
•When this feature is enabled (AUTO), the running boards will move
back to the correct positions based off of the door positions.
Bounce-Back
If an object is in the way of the moving running board, it will reverse
direction and move to the end of travel.
Load Carrying 247
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of your vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays, see the
Fuses chapter.
The load capacity of your vehicle is designated by weight not volume.
You may not necessarily be able to use all available space when loading
your vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places extra load on the engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires, and suspension. Inspect these components before, during
and after towing.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects your vehicle when
driving:
•Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
•Load the heaviest items centered between the left and right side
trailer tires.
•Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
•Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. You can
find more information about proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
You can also find information in the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized dealer.
248 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of
loss of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Ford does not
recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed
reduction may be detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver has
significant trailer towing experience, and can control trailer sway and
maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it
begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may turn
on multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at individual wheels and, if
necessary, reduces engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, the
stability control light flashes and the message TRAILER SWAY
REDUCE SPEED appears in the information display. The first thing to
do is slow your vehicle down, then pull safely to the side of the road and
check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution. See the Load
Carrying chapter for specific loading information.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration
listed in the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed:
•36.5 feet
2
(3.39 meters
2
) trailer frontal area for vehicles equipped
with the standard towing package.
•60.0 feet
2
(5.57 meters
2
) trailer frontal area for vehicles equipped
with the optional heavy duty package.
Note: Exceeding this limitation may significantly reduce the
performance of your towing vehicle. Selecting a trailer with a low
aerodynamic drag and rounded front design helps optimize performance
and fuel economy.
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
Towing 249
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as your vehicle’s electrical system may not include the
wiring connector needed to use electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is
less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your vehicle
configuration on the following chart.
To calculate the maximum loaded trailer weight for your vehicle:
1. Start with the gross combined weight rating for your vehicle model
and axle ratio. See the following chart.
2. Subtract all of the following that apply to your vehicle:
•Vehicle curb weight
•Hitch hardware weight, such as a draw bar, ball, locks or weight
distributing
•Driver weight
•Passenger(s) weight
•Payload, cargo and luggage weight
•Aftermarket equipment weight.
3. This equals the maximum loaded trailer weight for this combination.
Note: The trailer tongue load figures into the payload for your vehicle.
Reduce the total payload by the final trailer tongue weight.
Consult an authorized dealer to determine the maximum trailer weight
allowed for your vehicle if you are not sure.
Vehicle type Towing package Maximum GCWR
Two-wheel drive
(except EL)
Standard
12300 lb (5579 kg)
Two-wheel drive EL 12500 lb (5669 kg)
Four-wheel drive
(except EL)
12500 lb (5669 kg)
Four-wheel drive EL 12800 lb (5806 kg)
Two-wheel drive
(except EL)
Optional Heavy Duty
14900 lb (6758 kg)
Two-wheel drive EL 15200 lb (6894 kg)
Four-wheel drive
(except EL)
15100 lb (6849 kg)
Four-wheel drive EL 15300 lb (6940 kg)
250 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
•Do not tow a trailer until you drive your vehicle at least 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers).
•Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
•See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
•Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your
scheduled maintenance information.
•If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency
gives you.
For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety
Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle’s load,
refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of your
vehicle load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a Trailer Towing Package
and 7–Pin Connector)
When attaching the trailer wiring
connector to your vehicle, only use
a proper fitting connector that
works with the vehicle and trailer
functions. If your vehicle has a
trailer towing package, it may have
a 7–pin connector. Some connectors
may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper
wiring connector and works correctly with your vehicle.
Color Function
1. Yellow Left turn signal and stop lamp
2. White Ground (-)
3. Blue Electric brakes
4. Green Right turn signal and stop lamp
5. Orange Battery (+)
6. Brown Running lights
7. Grey Reverse lights
Towing 251
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Hitches
WARNING: The trailer hitch on this vehicle is part of the vehicle
rear crash safety structure. Do not remove the trailer hitch.
Failure to follow this warning could compromise vehicle crash structure
and increase the risk of injury in a rear end crash.
Do not use a hitch that clamps onto your vehicle’s bumper. Use a
load-carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
Integrated Hitch Rating
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight
exceeds the limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle
structural damage, loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of
operation:
•Weight-carrying mode requires a draw bar and hitch ball. The draw
bar supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
•Weight-distributing mode requires an aftermarket weight-distributing
system, which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring bars and snap-up
brackets. This system distributes the vertical tongue load of the trailer
between the truck and the trailer.
Mode Maximum trailer
weight
Maximum tongue
weight
Weight-carrying 6000 lb (2721 kg) 600 lb (272 kg)
Weight-distributing 9200 lb (4173 kg) 920 lb (417 kg)
Note: These are hitch ratings only. Actual vehicle ratings are dependent
on engine, transmission and axle combinations.
Weight-distributing Hitch – Vehicles without Automatic Leveling
Suspension
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
252 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park your vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to your vehicle without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening
on the fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that
the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1
and H2.
6.
Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward your
vehicle. If not, adjust the ball height accordingly and repeat Steps 2–6.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle:
•
Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
•Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the hitch.
•Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by law
or the trailer manufacturer.
Weight-distributing Hitch – Vehicles with Automatic Leveling
Suspension
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
Note:
If you do not move the loaded vehicle for approximately 12 hours, the
leveling system may bleed down to a lower height. This can be especially
apparent if you leave a trailer attached to the parked vehicle for long
periods. You must drive your vehicle in order to re-level the suspension.
When connecting a trailer to a vehicle with automatic leveling suspension
using a weight-distributing hitch, always use the following procedure:
1.
Load the interior of the vehicle to a weight similar to that which you
intend to carry when towing. This includes things such as passenger
weight and cargo.
2. Drive the vehicle for approximately 2 miles (3 kilometers) to re-level
the suspension.
3. Park your vehicle, without the trailer, on a level surface.
4. Measure the height to the top of your vehicle’s front wheel opening on
the fender. This is H1.
Towing 253
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
5. Attach the trailer to your vehicle without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
6. Make sure you securely attach and lock the trailer tongue to the hitch.
7. Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by
law or the trailer manufacturer.
8. Drive the vehicle and trailer at 20–25 mph (32–40 km/h) for
approximately 2 miles (3 kilometers) to re-level the suspension.
9. Park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface.
10. Measure the height to the top of your vehicles front wheel opening on
the fender a second time. This is H2.
11. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that
the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1
and H2.
12. Check that the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle.
If it is not, remove the trailer, adjust the ball height accordingly, and
repeat Steps 5 -11.
Once the trailer is level or slightly nose down toward the vehicle:
•Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
•Check that the trailer tongue securely attaches and locks onto the
hitch.
•Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer brake controls as required by
law or the trailer manufacturer.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if you install them properly and adjust them to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and federal regulations.
254 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The rating for the tow vehicle’s braking system operation is at the
gross vehicle weight rating, not the gross combined weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control
of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds
(680 kilograms) when loaded.
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped)
WARNING: The Ford TBC has been verified to be compatible
with trailers having electric-actuated drum brakes (one to four
axles) and some electric-over-hydraulic (EOH) brakes. It will not
activate hydraulic surge-style trailer brakes. It is the responsibility of
the customer to ensure that the trailer brakes are adjusted
appropriately, functioning normally and all electric connections are
properly made. Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle control,
crash or serious injury.
When used properly, the trailer brake controller assists in smooth and
effective trailer braking by powering the trailer’s electric or
electric-over-hydraulic brakes with a proportional output based on the
towing vehicle’s brake pressure.
Ford has tested the trailer brake controller to be compatible with several
major brands of electric-over-hydraulic trailer brakes. Contact an
authorized dealer for information on which brands you can use.
The controller user interface consists of the following:
A. + and - (Gain adjustment buttons): Pressing these buttons adjusts
the controller’s power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. You
can increase the gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailer braking) or
decrease it to 0 (no trailer braking). The gain setting displays in the
message center as follows: TBC GAIN = XX.X.
The controller shows gain setting, output bar graph, and trailer
connectivity status in the information display. They appear in the
Towing 255
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
information display as follows:
•TBC GAIN = XX.X NO TRAILER: Shows the current gain setting
during a given ignition cycle and when adjusting the gain. This also
displays if you use the manual control lever or make gain adjustments
with no trailer connected.
•TBC GAIN = XX.X OUTPUT=//////:Displays when you push
your vehicle’s brake pedal, or when you use the manual control. Bar
indicators illuminate in the information display to indicate the amount
of power going to the trailer brakes relative to the brake pedal or
manual control input. One bar indicates the least amount of output;
six bars indicate maximum output.
•TRAILER CONNECTED: Displays when the system senses a
correct trailer wiring connection (a trailer with electric trailer brakes)
during a given ignition cycle.
•TRAILER DISCONNECTED: Displays, accompanied by a single
audible chime, when the system senses a trailer connection and then
a disconnection, either intentional or unintentional, during a given
ignition cycle. It also displays if a truck or trailer-wiring fault occurs
causing the trailer to appear disconnected. This message can also
display if you use the manual control lever without a trailer
connected.
B. Manual control lever: Slide the control lever to the left to turn on
the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s brakes. See
the following Procedure for adjusting gain section for instructions on
proper use of this feature. If you use the manual control while the brake
is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent
to the trailer brakes.
•Stop lamps: Using the manual control lever illuminates both the
trailer brake lamps and your vehicle brake lamps except the center
high-mount stop lamp, if you make the proper electrical connection
to the trailer. Pressing your vehicle brake pedal also illuminates both
trailer and vehicle brake lamps.
256 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Procedure for Adjusting Gain
Note: Only perform this procedure in a traffic-free environment at
speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
The gain setting sets the trailer brake controller for the specific towing
condition. You should change the setting as towing conditions change.
Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road
conditions and weather.
The gain should be set to provide the maximum trailer braking assistance
while making sure the trailer wheels do not lock when using the brakes.
Locked trailer wheels may lead to trailer instability.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition,
functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to
the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When you plug in a trailer with electric or electric-over-hydraulic
brakes, TRAILER CONNECTED appears in the information display.
4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -) buttons to increase or decrease
the gain setting to the desired starting point. A gain setting of 6.0 is a
good starting point for heavier loads.
5. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at
a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual control
lever completely.
6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicated by squealing tires, reduce the
gain setting. If the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the gain setting.
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the gain setting is at a point just below
trailer wheel lock-up. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lock-up
may not be attainable even with the maximum gain setting of 10.
Explanation of Information Display Warning Messages
Note: An authorized dealer can diagnose the trailer brake controller to
determine exactly which trailer fault has occurred. However, your Ford
warranty does not cover this diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.
TRAILER BRAKE MODULE FAULT: Displays in response to faults
sensed by the trailer brake controller, accompanied by a single chime. If
this message appears, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair. The controller may still function, but
performance may be degraded.
WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER: Displays when there is a short circuit
on the electric brake output wire. If the WIRING FAULT ON TRAILER
message displays, accompanied by a single chime, with no trailer
Towing 257
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
connected, the problem is with your vehicle wiring between the trailer
brake controller and the 7–pin connector at the bumper. If the message
only displays with a trailer connected, the problem is with the trailer
wiring. Consult your trailer dealer for assistance. This can be a short to
ground (such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage (such as a pulled pin
on trailer emergency breakaway battery) or the trailer brakes may be
drawing too much current.
Points to Remember
Note: Do not attempt removal of the trailer brake controller without
consulting the Workshop Manual. Damage to the unit may result.
•Adjust gain setting before using the trailer brake controller for the
first time.
•Adjust gain setting, using the procedure above, whenever road,
weather and trailer or vehicle loading conditions change from when
the gain was initially set.
•Only use the manual control lever for proper adjustment of the gain
during trailer setup. Misuse, such as application during trailer sway,
could cause instability of trailer or tow vehicle.
•Avoid towing in adverse weather conditions. The trailer brake
controller does not provide anti-lock control of the trailer wheels.
Trailer wheels can lock up on slippery surfaces, resulting in reduced
stability of trailer and tow vehicle.
•The trailer brake controller is equipped with a feature that reduces
output at vehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h) so trailer and
vehicle braking is not jerky or harsh. This feature is only available
when applying the brakes using your vehicle’s brake pedal, not the
controller.
•The controller interacts with the brake control system and powertrain
control system of your vehicle to provide the best performance on
different road conditions.
•Your vehicle’s brake system and the trailer brake system work
independently of each other. Changing the gain setting on the
controller does not affect the operation of your vehicle’s brakes
whether you attach a trailer or not.
•When you turn the engine off, the controller output is disabled and
the display and module shut down. The controller module and display
turn on when you turn the ignition on.
•The trailer brake controller is only a factory-installed or
dealer-installed item. Ford is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the controller due to misuse or customer installation.
258 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer lamp wiring to the
vehicle’s tail lamp wiring; this may damage the electrical system
resulting in a fire. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of your
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
•Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers).
•Do not make full-throttle starts.
•Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
•When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place
the gearshift in position Pto aid engine and transmission cooling and
to help air conditioning performance.
•Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on
long, steep grades.
•Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.
•If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul
feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking
and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
•If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac™ with RSC, this system
may turn on during typical cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded
trailer. This is normal. Turning the corner at a slower speed while
towing may reduce this tendency.
Towing 259
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions,
at the gross combined weight rating (or any combination of these
factors), consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant
(if the axle is not already filled with it). See the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for the lubricant specification.
•Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. Anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
•Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your vehicle tires away from
traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not included with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. A “temporary” spare tire is different in size (diameter or width),
tread-type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
than the road tires on your vehicle. Consult information on the tire label
or Safety Compliance label for limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from
the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
•Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
•Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
•Causing internal damage to the components.
•Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle submerges in
water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle lubricant, which does
not normally require checking or changing unless it is leaking or other
axle repair is required.
260 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment
to tow your vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company
has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your two-wheel drive vehicle towed with the
front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the
ground.
We recommend towing a four-wheel drive vehicle with all wheels off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment.
Towing 261
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following conditions:
•Your vehicle is facing forward for towing in a forward direction.
•Place the transmission in position N. See Automatic transmission in
the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the transmission into
N.
•Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
•Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Four-wheel-down Towing
Note: Make sure you properly secure your vehicle to the tow vehicle.
Entering four-wheel-down towing
1. Put the ignition in the on position:
•If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the key to on. Do not
start the engine.
•If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine
START/STOP button twice without pressing the brake pedal. Do
not start the engine.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Rotate the four–wheel drive switch to 2H.
4. Shift the transmission to position N.
5. Rotate the four–wheel drive switch from 2H to 4L and back to 2H
five times within seven seconds.
•If completed successfully, the information display shows
NEUTRAL TOW LEAVE IN N or NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED
LEAVE TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL. This indicates that
your vehicle is safe to tow with all wheels on the ground.
•If you do not see the message in the display, you must perform
the procedure again from the beginning.
•You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts into its
neutral position. This is normal.
6. Release the brake pedal.
262 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
7. Leave the transmission in position N.
•If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the ignition as far as it
goes toward the off position (it does not turn fully off when the
transmission is in position N.) You must leave the key in the
ignition while towing. To lock and unlock your vehicle, use the
keyless entry keypad or extra set of keys.
•If your vehicle has intelligent access, turn the ignition off by
pressing the engine START/STOP button once without pressing on
the brake pedal. You do not need to leave your keys in the
vehicle. You can lock and unlock your vehicle as you normally do.
WARNING: Do not disconnect the battery during recreational
towing. Doing so will prevent the transfer case from shifting
properly and may cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park).
WARNING: Shifting the transfer case to its neutral position for
recreational towing may cause the vehicle to be able to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured.
Make sure the foot brake is depressed and the vehicle is in a secure
and safe position while the transfer case is being shifted to its neutral
position.
WARNING: Failing to put the transfer case in its neutral position
will damage vehicle components.
Note: You can check four-wheel-down towing status at any time by
opening the driver’s door or turning the ignition to the accessory or on
position and verifying the NEUTRAL TOW ENABLED LEAVE
TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL message displays in the cluster.
Exiting four-wheel-down towing
To exit four-wheel-down towing and return the transfer case to its 2H
position:
1. With your vehicle still properly secured to the tow vehicle, put the
ignition in the on position:
•If your vehicle has an ignition key, turn the key to on. Do not
start the engine.
•If your vehicle has intelligent access, press the engine
START/STOP button twice without pressing the brake pedal. Do
not start the engine.
Towing 263
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission out of Nand into any gear.
4. Release the brake pedal.
•If completed successfully, the instrument cluster displays 4X2 and
NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.
•If the indicator light and message do not display, you must
perform the procedure again from the beginning.
•You may hear an audible noise as the transfer case shifts out of its
neutral position. This is normal.
•If SHIFT DELAY PULL FORWARD displays in the instrument
cluster, transfer case gear tooth blockage is present. See the
instructions after this section.
5. Apply the parking brake, and then disconnect the vehicle from the
tow vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake, start the engine, and shift the
transmission to position Dto make sure the transfer case is out of
position N.
7. If the transfer case does not successfully shift out of position N, set
the parking brake until you can have your vehicle serviced.
Resolving the SHIFT DELAY PULL FORWARD Message
If the instrument cluster displays SHIFT DELAY PULL FORWARD
perform the following:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Put the transmission into position N, and then start the engine.
3. With the engine running, shift the transmission to position Dand let
the vehicle roll forward, up to 3 feet (1 meter). You may hear an
audible noise as the transfer case shifts out of its neutral position.
This is normal.
4. Make sure the instrument cluster displays NEUTRAL TOW
DISABLED.
264 Towing
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles
(480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unique
driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through
the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
•Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
•Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
•Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
•Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
•Close the windows for high-speed driving.
•Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
•Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
•Use the recommended engine oil.
•Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
•Sudden or hard accelerations.
•Rev the engine before turning it off.
•Idle for periods longer than one minute.
•Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
•Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
•Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
•Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
•Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
•Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 pounds [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
Driving Hints 265
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g.; bug deflectors,
rollbars or light bars, running boards, ski racks).
•Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through flowing or deep water as you
may lose control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check the depth. Never drive
through water that is higher than the bottom
of the wheel hubs.
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle. Your
brake performance and traction may be
limited. After driving through water and as
soon as it is safe to do so:
•Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
•Check that the horn works.
•Check that the exterior lights work.
•Turn the steering wheel to check that the steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
266 Driving Hints
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always make sure that the floor mats are properly
attached to the retention posts in the carpet that are supplied
with your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly secured to both
retention posts to make sure mats do not shift out of position.
WARNING: Never place floor mats or any other covering in the
vehicle foot well that cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
WARNING: Never place floor mats or any other covering on top
of already installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other
covering. Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the
pedal clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
WARNING: Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis.
Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
WARNING:
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver foot well while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose
can become trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
attachment instructions can potentially cause interference with
pedal operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Driving Hints 267
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary Roadside Assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
•24 hours a day, seven days a week.
•For the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your Owner’s Manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
•A flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
•Battery jump start.
•Lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
•Fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law, shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters)
of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
•Winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
•Towing – Ford eligible vehicles will be towed to an authorized dealer
within 35 miles (56.3 kilometers) of the disablement location or to the
nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to an
authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56.3 kilometers) from the
disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 miles (56.3 kilometers).
Roadside Assistance will include up to $200 coverage for a towed trailer
if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized
dealer. If the towing vehicle is operational but the trailer is not, then the
trailer does not qualify for any roadside services.
268 Roadside Emergencies
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s manual
portfolio in the glove compartment.
United States Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance,
call 1-800-241-3673. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for
yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest Ford dealership within 35 miles (56.3 kilometers).
To obtain reimbursement information, United States Ford vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673. Customers will be asked to submit their
original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who require roadside assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside Assistance
For your convenience, you may complete the roadside assistance
identification card found in the centerfold of this warranty guide and
retain for future reference.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. If you require more information, please refer to the coverage
section of your warranty guide, call us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006 or
visit our website at www.ford.ca.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered services in Canada or the continental
United States. Coverage extends to vehicles that use public, non-seasonal,
annually traveled roadways. Roadside Assistance coverage does not extend
to vehicles involved in cross-country driving, logging, autocross and any
other form of off-road use. Well maintained roads and surfaces help ensure
safe travel for the supplier, and allow their representatives to perform
service as per the standard operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by road to the nearest
authorized dealership, transportation by rail or water may be necessary.
The program covers a tow to the dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip. For rail or water transportation,
however, contact your authorized dealer to confirm if you are eligible for
additional coverage before you authorize or pay for the service. Call the
Ford Roadside Assistance at 1-800-665-2006 for additional information.
Roadside Emergencies 269
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel
by the radio. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
•Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
•Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Note: With extended use, the flashers may run down your 12–volt
battery.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: Failure to inspect and, if necessary, repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle includes a fuel
pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Not every
impact will cause a shut off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button to start the
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the START/STOP
button to switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine by pressing the brake pedal
and the START/STOP button, or switch on the ignition only by pressing
the START/STOP button without pressing the brake pedal. Both ways
re-enable the fuel system.
270 Roadside Emergencies
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle after a fuel shutoff, the
vehicle makes sure that various systems are safe to restart. Once your
vehicle determines that the systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not restart after your third
attempt, contact an authorized dealer.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability
of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making
sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles
and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
2. Check all battery terminals. Remove the positive terminal cover (if
equipped) and any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery
cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Roadside Emergencies 271
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
4
2
1
3
272 Roadside Emergencies
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
4
1
3
2
Roadside Emergencies 273
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform
all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing Address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.fordowner.com.
These are some of the items that can be found online:
•U.S. Dealer Locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
•Owner Manuals
•Maintenance Schedules
•Recalls
•Ford Extended Service Plans
•Ford Genuine Accessories
•Service specials and promotions.
274 Customer Assistance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter
@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
In order to help serve you better, please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Your telephone number (home and business)
•The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
•The vehicle’s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
Customer Assistance 275
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18000 mi (29 000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resorting to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
276 Customer Assistance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the Services
You Need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within 40 days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not bound
by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court where
all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are admissible in
the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE
decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must comply with the
decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
Customer Assistance 277
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION or ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
This pertains to vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In
those cases, where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle
service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in
an impartial third party mediation or arbitration program administered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straightforward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact our Customer
Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company or Ford
of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the United States.
278 Customer Assistance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: expcac@ford.com
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern
Mariana Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin
Islands, please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: prcac@ford.com
www.ford.com.pr
Customer Assistance 279
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living
in the Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: menacac@ford.com
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
Growth Initiatives by emailing expcac@ford.com.
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest
authorized dealer. In the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the dealership’s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. If you require
additional assistance or clarification, please contact the
respective Customer Relationship Center as previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
280 Customer Assistance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
A French owner’s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htm
Customer Assistance 281
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in your
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are identified
by a broken wire within the fuse.
Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, see Changing the
Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
15
282 Fuses
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp rating Protected circuits
1 — Rear washer relay
2 — Starter relay
3 — Blower motor relay
4 — Rear wiper relay
5 — Fuel pump relay
6 — Electronic cooling fan
7 — Rear window defroster, heated
mirror relay
8 — Electronic cooling fan
9 — Run/start relay
10 — Power distribution box relay
11 40A** Power running boards, heated
seats
12 40A** Run/start relay
13 30A ** Starter relay
14 50A** Electronic cooling fan
15 — Not used
16 50A** Electronic fan
17 — Not used
Fuses 283
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp rating Protected circuits
18 30A** Trailer brake
19 20A** Power point (console)
20 20A** 4x4 module relay
21 30A** Trailer tow module
22 30A** Passenger power seat
23 — Air conditioner clutch relay
24 — Trailer tow park lamp relay
25 — Not used
26 10A* ALT sensor
27 20A* 4x4 all wheel drive module
28 25A* Trailer tow park lamp relay
29 10A* Integrated wheel end solenoid
30 10A* Air conditioner clutch relay
31 15A* Trailer tow back up lamp
32 40A** Blower motor relay
33 40A** 110–volt AC power point
34 30A** Auxiliary blower motor
35 50A** Powertrain control module relay
36 30A** Power liftgate
37 — Not used
38 — Not used
39 — Trailer tow backup lamps relay
40 — Electronic fan 2 relay
41 10A* Powertrain control module
keep-alive power
42 5A* Run/start relay
43 10A* Brake on/off switch
44 20A* Fuel pump relay
45 10A* Not used (spare)
46 15A* Front/rear washer pump
47 30A** Rear wiper motor
284 Fuses
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp rating Protected circuits
48 40A** Trailer tow module
49 — Not used
50 30A** Front wiper motor relay
51 40A** Rear window defroster and heated
mirror relay
52 10A* Anti-lock brake system run/start
feed
53 5A* Powertrain control module ISP
54 5A* Power steering
55 — Not used
56 30A* Passenger compartment fuse panel
run/start feed
57 5A* Blower motor run/start
58 — Not used
59 15A* Heated mirrors
60 — Not used
61 — Not used
62 — Not used
63 25A** Electronic fan
64 30A** Moonroof
65 — Not used
66 20A** Auxiliary power point (rear of
center console)
67 40A** Front row climate controlled seats
68 30A** Anti-lock brake system valves
69 60A** Anti-lock brake system pump
70 30A** Third row power fold seat
71 20A** Auxiliary power point/cigar lighter
72 20A** Auxiliary power point (right rear
quarter panel)
73 30A** Rear seat climate module
74 30A** Driver power seat
Fuses 285
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp rating Protected circuits
75 25A* Vehicle power 1 – powertrain
control module
76 20A* Vehicle power 2 – powertrain
control module
77 20A* Vehicle power4–ignitioncoils
78 — Not used
79 15A* Vehicle power 3 – powertrain
control module
80 5A* Rain sensor
81 — Not used
82 — Not used
83 — Not used
84 — Not used
85 — Not used
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel.
To remove the trim panel for access
to the fuse box, pull the panel
toward you and swing it out away
from the side and remove it. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it
shut.
To remove the fuse box cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
286 Fuses
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp rating Protected circuits
1 30A Driver window
2 15A Rear seat control, multimedia
gateway module
3 30A Passenger window
4 10A Demand lamps
5 20A Amplifier
6 5A Rear electronic automatic
temperature control
7 7.5A Power mirror, driver seat memory
switch
8 — Not used
Fuses 287
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp rating Protected circuits
9 10A SYNC, power lift gate, electric finish
panel, display
10 10A Run accessory relay
11 10A Passive entry/start module
12 15A Interior lighting, puddle lamps
13 15A Right turn and stop/turn signals
14 15A Left turn and stop/turn signals
15 15A Reverse lamp, center high mount
stop lamp, EC mirror
16 10A Right front low beam
17 10A Left front low beam
18 10A Brake shift interlock/start button
LED/keypad illumination, third row
power folding seat, passive entry
touch start
19 — Not used
20 20A Lock/unlock relays
21 — Not used
22 20A Horn
23 15A SWCM, cluster
24 15A Adjustable pedals/power adjustable
column, Datalink
25 15A Liftgate release decklid, liftglass
release motor
26 5A Push to start switch
27 20A Passive entry/start module
28 15A Ignition switch, key inhibit switch
29 20A Radio, GPS
30 15A Front park lamps
31 5A Trailer brake on/off
32 15A Power vent, rear windows, power
inverter
33 10A CCD suspension module
288 Fuses
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Fuse or relay
location
Fuse amp rating Protected circuits
34 10A Rear park assist, rear camera, BLIS,
heated seat
35 5A Climate module, O/D switch
36 — Not used
37 10A 4X4 module
38 10A EC mirror, moonroof, DVD, AM/FM
radio
39 15A Left and right front high beams
40 10A Rear park/tail lamps
41 7.5A Restraints control module
42 — Not used
43 — Not used
44 — Not used
45 5A Not used (spare)
46 10A Climate control
47 15A Fog lamps
48 — Not used
49 — Not used
Fuses 289
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Turn off the power running boards, if equipped,
before working under the vehicle, jacking or placing any object
under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended
running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
•Do not work on a hot engine.
•Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
•Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
•Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
290 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to position P(Park) .
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
BRAKE
Maintenance 291
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
3.5L V6 EcoBoost® engine
A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Battery
C. Engine oil filler cap
D. Engine oil dipstick
E. Brake fluid reservoir
F. Engine coolant reservoir
G. Air filter assembly
H. Power distribution box
292 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A.–MIN
B. – MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick. See the
Under Hood Overview in this chapter for location of dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN
and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough oil
to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the
MIN-MAX range.
Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
A B
Maintenance 293
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level dipstick or the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add engine oil
that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications for
more information. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to
pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance
Information.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below the MIN mark, or empty,
add coolant immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
294 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Robinair Coolant and Battery Refractometer
75240. We do not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling system sealants or additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling or heating systems. This
damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
•
DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm
engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty.
Maintenance 295
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant
may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with engine
coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can
cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.
•Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
•Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the
cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
•A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the
overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.
296 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
•It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
•A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The fail-safe distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and
terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge
will move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
•The engine power will be limited.
•The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be restarted. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Maintenance 297
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When Fail-Safe Mode is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
298 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are
outside of the normal operating range, the performance of the system
could be compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system.
There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. For additional information on
the electric power steering (EPS) system, Refer to Driving Aids.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same
reservoir.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
Maintenance 299
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Note: Wash hands after
handling.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of
service.
300 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery
during storage.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
•The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
•Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
Maintenance 301
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Fold back the wiper arm and
position the wiper blade at a right
angle to the wiper arm.
2. To remove the wiper blade, press
the retaining clip (A) to disengage
the wiper blade, then pull the blade
down toward the windshield to
remove it from the arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on the arm and press it into place until a
click is heard.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing the Rear Window Wiper Blade
To replace the rear wiper blade:
1. Pull the wiper arm as far away from the glass as possible. Do not use
excessive force because it can break the wiper arm. Hold it there until
the next step.
2. Grasp the wiper blade and rotate
it away from the wiper arm using
moderate force until it disengages
from the wiper arm.
3. Once the wiper blade is loose,
slide it away from the wiper arm.
A
302 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4. To attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm, align the cross pin and
keyway (denoted with the arrows)
and firmly press the wiper blade
into the wiper arm until an audible
snap is heard.
If you find this procedure too difficult, please see your dealer.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or
personal burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. See Motorcraft® Part Numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
See Scheduled Maintenance Information for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
Maintenance 303
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Changing the Air Filter Element
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air
outlet tube. This connector will
need to be unplugged.
2. Unlock the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), then squeeze and
pull the connector off of the air
outlet tube.
3. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.
304 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
5. Release the three clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the center of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.
8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air
filter housing and tighten the
air-tube clamp bolt snugly, but do
not overtighten it.
10. Reconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).
Maintenance 305
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, an authorized dealer should
check the alignment of your headlamps.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
•(A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
•(B) Center height of lamp to
ground
•(C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
•(D) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 millimeter circle on the lens) to the ground and mark an 8 foot
(2.4 meter) horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that lamp
hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam
will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the
horizontal reference line.
C
A
B
D
306 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a Phillips
#2 screwdriver to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise or
clockwise in order to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp. The
upper edge of the light pattern
should line up to the horizontal line.
6. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NOT ADJUSTABLE.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
•Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets).
•Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp
water leak):
•Water puddle inside the lamp.
•Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
Maintenance 307
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing Headlamp Bulbs
WARNING: Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep
out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base
and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Open the hood.
3. At the back of the headlamp,
remove the two headlamp assembly
retainer bolts.
4. Slide headlamp assembly forward
and off the retaining tab to expose
the back of the bulb and electrical
connector.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
6. Remove the bulb by turning it
counterclockwise and then pulling it
straight out.
7. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, turn the new bulb
clockwise to install.
8. Connect the electrical connector.
9. Install the headlamp assembly and secure with two retainer bolts.
308 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing Front Parking Lamp and Direction Indicator Bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Open the hood.
3. At the back of the headlamp,
remove the two headlamp assembly
retainer bolts.
4. Slide headlamp assembly forward
and off the retaining tab to expose
the back of the headlamp assembly.
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from the
lamp assembly.
6. Carefully pull the bulb out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the lamp
assembly and rotate clockwise.
8. Install the headlamp assembly and
secure with two retainer bolts.
Replacing Side Marker Bulbs
These lamps are designed with LED light sources. For replacement, see
your authorized dealer.
Maintenance 309
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker, and Backup Lamp
Bulbs
The tail, stop, turn signal, side marker and backup lamp bulbs are
located in the same portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the
other. Follow the same steps to replace any bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assembly screws.
2. Remove the two TORX screws
from the lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp
assembly away from the vehicle by
pulling the assembly straight out to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two TORX screws.
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs
1. From underneath the vehicle,
rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise to remove it from
the fog lamp assembly.
2. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the
two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse
order.
Replacing LED Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)
These lamps are designed with LED light sources. For replacement, see
your authorized dealer.
310 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located above the license plate on the
liftgate. To change the license plate bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Remove the license lamp screw
from the assembly.
3. Pull the lamp down and twist the
bulb socket counterclockwise. Remove
the bulb socket from the lamp.
4. Pull out the old bulb and push in
the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket in the lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
6. Install the lamp assembly and secure it with the retaining screw.
Replacing the High-Mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
To change the high-mount brake
lamp bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws holding
the lamp assembly in place.
2. Pull the lamp assembly straight
out.
3. Disconnect the wire harness.
4. Press the four tabs that hold the
light assembly on, one at a time,
and pull the black bulb carrier away
from the lamp.
5. Pull the old bulb out and replace
with the new bulb.
6. Snap the black bulb carrier into
the lamp assembly.
7. Connect the wire harness.
8. Install the lamp assembly with two screws.
Replacing Approach Lamp/Mirror Turn Signal Bulbs (If Equipped)
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Maintenance 311
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure
lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function Number of bulbs Trade number
Headlamps (low and
high-beam)
4 H11 / HB3 — If equipped
with reflectors
HB3 / H9 — If equipped
with projector and reflector
Front side marker — LED
Front park/turn lamps 2 7444 Amber
Fog lamps 2 9140
Fog lamps — LED — LED
Front row map lamps 2 W5W
Front row map/dome lamps 3 578
Rear cargo lamp 1 578
2nd row reading lamp 2 W5W
Turn/tail/brake/side marker
lamps
2 3157K
Backup lamp 2 921
Approach/mirror turn signal
lamps (if equipped)
2 906
Mirror approach lamps – non
turn signal (if equipped)
2 *See your dealer
License lamp 2 168
Visor vanity lamp - Slide on
rail system (SOR)
2 A6224PF
High-mount brake lamp 5 W5W
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
* To obtain replacement approach lamp assembly bulbs, see your authorized
dealer and reference Ford part no. 2L1Z–13B374–BB for the passenger side
mirror and 2L1Z–13B375–BB for the driver side mirror.
312 Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (United States only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (United
States only) (ZC-32-B2)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-56)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (United States only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft® Detail Wash.
•Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
•Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
•Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
Vehicle Care 313
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
•Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash it
off as soon as possible.
•Remove any exterior accessories before entering a car wash.
Stripes or Graphics (if equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure wand on the surface or edge
of stripes and graphics. This can cause damage to the film and cause the
edge of the film to peel away from the vehicle surface.
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
•Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash.
•
Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as you
would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the cleaner
to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag.
•Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
•Note: Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe
and permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
•For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash.
•
If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
314 Vehicle Care
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect the paint on your car from the
elements. We recommend that you wash and wax the painted surface
once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle in a shaded area out of
direct sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before applying wax.
•
Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
•Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to apply and remove the wax.
•Apply a small amount of wax in a back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
•Do not allow wax to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss
black) colored trim. The wax discolors or stains the parts over time,
such as:
•Bumpers
•Grained door handles
•Side mouldings
•Mirror housings
•Windshield cowl area.
•Do not apply wax to glass areas.
•After waxing, your car’s paint should feel smooth, and be free of streaks
and smudges.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
an authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
•Before repairing minor paint damage, use a cleaner such as Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover to remove particles such as bird droppings, tree
sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before
repairing paint chips.
•Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
•
Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
•Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
Vehicle Care 315
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft
Engine Shampoo.
•Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
•Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
•Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
•The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.) or Motorcraft
Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada).
•The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrates in the U.S., or
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada.
Replace your wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
•Do not use abrasive materials, as they may cause scratches.
•Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage
to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
316 Vehicle Care
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
•Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
•Apply a layer of high quality foam cleaner designed for automotive
interiors, such as Motorcraft Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner, to the
dry stained area(s) of the item you are cleaning and let it soak in for
one minute.
•If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
•If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring can set.
•Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner.
Remove fresh spots immediately. Clean the seat with a damp cloth, using
a mild soap and water solution, if necessary.
Vehicle Care 317
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as cleaning leather seats for cleaning
leather instrument panels and leather interior trim surfaces. See
Cleaning Leather Seats in this chapter.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white,
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry, white, cotton cloth to dry these areas.
•Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
•
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact
with certain products, such as insect repellent and suntan lotion, in
order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.
•Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
•Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for automotive interiors. Test any
cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white, cotton cloth
and a mild soap and water solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area.
Allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
318 Vehicle Care
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH® EDITION)
Note: For the King Ranch® Edition leather seats, refer to a separate
section in this chapter.
•Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
•For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a soft cloth.
•If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
•To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
(IF EQUIPPED WITH THE KING RANCH® EDITION)
Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain
leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and
maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort.
Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the
leather.
Cleaning
For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft brush.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution.
•Clean spills as quickly as possible.
•Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the
leather as cleaners may darken the leather.
•Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based
products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather.
•Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics.
Vehicle Care 319
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Scratches
Natural Markings - Because the leather in the seat comes from genuine
steer hides, there will be evidence of naturally occurring markings, such
as small scars. These markings give character to the seating covers and
should be considered as proof of a genuine leather product.
In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear
marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same
instructions as in the Conditioning section.
Conditioning
Bottles of King Ranch® Leather Conditioner are available at the King
Ranch® Saddle Shop. Visit the website at www.krsaddleshop.com,or
telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are
unable to obtain King Ranch® Leather Conditioner, use another premium
leather conditioner.
•Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section.
•Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of
conditioner to a clean, dry cloth.
•Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the
conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a
film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
A clearcoat paint finish coats aluminum wheels and wheel covers. In
order to maintain their condition:
•Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Use a sponge to
remove heavy deposits of dirt and brake dust accumulation. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water when you have completed
the cleaning process.
•To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
•Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
•Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers.
320 Vehicle Care
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could
wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
•Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
•If you intend on parking your vehicle for an extended period after
cleaning the wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few
minutes before doing so. This reduces the risk of increased corrosion
of the brake discs.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long-term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
•Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
•Protect from sunlight, if possible.
•If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
•Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
•Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
•Touch up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
•Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
•Lubricate hood latch, all door latches and trunk lid hinges with a light
grade oil.
•Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
•Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
Vehicle Care 321
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Engine
•The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contains contaminates that may cause engine damage.
•Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
•With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
•Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
•Protect against freezing temperatures.
•When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
•Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
•If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
•Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
•Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
•Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
•Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
322 Vehicle Care
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
•Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
•Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
•Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
•Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
•Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
•Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
•Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
•If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
Vehicle Care 323
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Truck Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers.
•Drive at safe speeds for the conditions.
•Keep tires properly inflated.
•Never overload or improperly load your vehicle.
•Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts. Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Utility vehicles, vans and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles, vans and
trucks are not designed for cornering
at speeds as high as passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
Four-Wheel Drive System (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of
four-wheel drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive vehicle
may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in low-traction
situations, it will not stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive (when selected) has the ability
to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
324 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select different drive
modes as necessary. You can find information on transfer case operation
and shifting procedures in the Transmission chapter. You can find
information on transfer case maintenance in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive
to four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary
clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front
drivetrain comes up to speed and are not cause for concern.
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
Sport-utility vehicles, vans and
trucks can differ from some other
vehicles in a few noticeable ways.
Your vehicle may be:
•Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody
components.
•Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Wheels and Tires 325
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, sport-utility vehicles,
vans and trucks often will have a
higher center of gravity and a
greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire
Quality Grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
•Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
326 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1
1
⁄
2
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Wheels and Tires 327
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Glossary of Tire Terminology
•Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
•Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
•Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
•Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 (2.5 bar) depending on tire size and for Metric tires
36 psi (2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure
will not increase the tire capability.
•Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load-carrying
capability.
•kPa: KiloPascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
•PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
•Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been
stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to
the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
•Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
•B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
•Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
•Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
•Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
•Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
328 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association, that
may be used for service on cars, sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either the European Tire and Rim Technical Organization
or the Japan Tire Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
CDEFG
Wheels and Tires 329
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 (130)
N 87 (140)
Q 99 (159)
R 106 (171)
S 112 (180)
T 118 (190)
U 124 (200)
H 130 (210)
V 149 (240)
W 168 (270)
Y 186 (299 )
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
330 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
•Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
•Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
•Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Wheels and Tires 331
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can
be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which
is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such
as standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual, defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single,
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
A
BC
B
D
332 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Information on T Type Tires
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires. These differences are
described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for temporary service on cars, sport-utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load
Carrying chapter.
A
BCD
E
Wheels and Tires 333
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and
not appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
334 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s maximum
permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum load can be
carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure, which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot (for
example, driven more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or
reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Wheels and Tires 335
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare tires, see the Dissimilar Spare Tire
and Wheel Assembly Information section. Store and maintain at 60 psi
(4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see Dissimilar Spare
Tire and Wheel Assembly Information under Changing a Road Wheel
in this chapter. Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2
millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
336 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected,
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (such as load, speed,
inflation pressure) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Wheels and Tires 337
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found
on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels, then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
338 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at
the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66 meters) away from the
tire wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires should generally be replaced as a
pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your
tire pressure monitoring system, or some component of the system may
be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING:
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Wheels and Tires 339
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
•Observe posted speed limits.
•Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
•Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
•Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may
be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as
340 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
a spare tire or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from
the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel
assembly, it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used
in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in your
scheduled maintenance information) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.
•Rear-wheel drive
vehicles/Four-wheel drive vehicles
(front tires at left of diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer unit failure.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
Wheels and Tires 341
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
•If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
•Use only cable type chains or chains offered by Ford/Lincoln as an
accessory or equivalent. Other conventional link type chains may
contact and cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or body.
•Do not install chains on the front wheels as this may interfere with
suspension components.
•Only certain snow cables or chains have been approved by
Ford/Lincoln as safe for use on your vehicle with the following tires:
265/70R17 and 275/65R18.
•You should only install snow cables or chains that have been rated as
SAE Class S.
•Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
•Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) or less if recommended by the chain
manufacturer while using snow chains.
•Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
•Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
•Purchase chains or cables from a manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions. The snow chains or cables must be
mounted in pairs on the rear tires only.
If you have any questions regarding snow chains or cables, please
contact your Ford/Lincoln dealer.
342 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
Wheels and Tires 343
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Take care when
changing the tire to avoid damaging
the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate
tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the spare, the tire
pressure monitoring system will continue to identify an issue to remind
you that the damaged road wheel or tire needs to be repaired and put
back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire pressure monitoring system, have
the damaged road wheel or tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
For additional information, see Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System in this section.
344 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. See the following chart for
information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Solid warning
light
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended
pressure as shown on the Tire Label
(located on the edge of driver’s door
or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be
driven for at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When your spare tire
is installed in this section.
Tire pressure
monitoring
system
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
without sensor
training
On vehicles with different front and
rear tire pressures, the system must
be retrained following every tire
rotation. See Tire rotation in this
chapter.
Wheels and Tires 345
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Flashing warning
light
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system function. For a
description on how the system
functions, see When your spare tire
is installed in this section.
Tire pressure
monitoring
system
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to
28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight
with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light
is on, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest
location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
346 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING:
The use of tire sealant may damage your tire pressure
monitoring system and should only be used in roadside emergencies.
If you must use a sealant, the Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be
used. The tire pressure monitoring system sensor and valve stem on the
wheel must be replaced by an authorized dealer after use of the sealant.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitoring
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate
when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full function of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on this vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the system sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in
this chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the tire pressure monitoring system sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended
for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is
the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire
size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
Wheels and Tires 347
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
•exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
•load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
•tow a trailer.
•use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire.
•use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
•use commercial car washing equipment.
•try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
•All-wheel driving capability
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
•exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
•use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time.
•use commercial car washing equipment.
•use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
•Handling, stability and braking performance
•Comfort and noise
348 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Ground clearance and parking at curbs
•Winter weather driving capability
•Wet weather driving capability
•All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
•Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
•towing a trailer.
•driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
•driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in park (P).
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission in park (P), set
the parking brake and block (in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being
changed.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported
only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
Wheels and Tires 349
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment
with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
WARNING: Disable the power running boards before jacking,
lifting, or placing any object under the vehicle. Never place your
hand between the power running board and vehicle as extended power
running boards will retract when the doors are closed. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in personal injury.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
Park on a level surface, set the parking brake, and activate the hazard
flashers. Place the transmission in park (P) and turn the engine off.
Location of the Spare Tire and Tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Item Location
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack tools Under the access panel located in
the floor compartment behind the
rear seat
Removing the Jack and Tools
1. Open the liftgate, then locate the
access panel on the floor behind the
third row seat. Unlatch and remove
the panel.
2. Remove the jack and tools
assembly tray from the compartment
by turning the wing-nut
counterclockwise. Remove the bag
from the jack and tool assembly tray
by loosening the strap.
350 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation of the bag, because it will
have to be reinstalled after changing the tire.
3. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench, jack extension and handle from the
plastic tray.
4. Remove the jack from the tray assembly.
Removing the Spare Tire
1. Remove the jack handle and
winch extension from the tray and
assemble them.
2. Open the spare tire winch access
plug in the bottom of the
compartment for the jack and tools
tray.
3. Insert the winch extension tool
assembly through the access hole in
the floor and engage the winch.
4. To remove the spare tire, turn the handle counterclockwise until the
tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack.
5. Slide the retainer through the center of the spare tire wheel.
6. With the vehicle on level ground,
block both sides of the wheel
diagonally opposite (other side and
end of the vehicle) to the wheel
being changed. Do not jack the
vehicle on a hill or incline.
7. Turn off the deployable running boards. See the Driving Aids
chapter.
8. Obtain the spare tire and jack tools from their storage locations.
9. Use the tip of the jack handle to remove any wheel trim.
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
Wheels and Tires 351
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
11. Position the jack according to
the jack locator arrows found on the
frame and turn the jack handle and
extension tool assembly clockwise.
Note: Use the frame rail as the
jacking location point, not the
control arm.
12. Raise the vehicle to provide sufficient ground clearance when
installing the spare tire, about 1/4 inch (6 millimeters).
•Front
•Rear
•Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
13. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
14. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward.
15. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
16. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
352 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
17. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown and reinstall the wheel cover.
See Wheel Lug Nut Torque
Specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
18. Unblock the wheels.
19. Put flat tire, jack, lug wrench and tools away. Make sure the jack bag
is properly reinstalled around the jack and tools assembly tray with the
strap securely fastened. Be sure to tighten the wing nut sufficiently so it
does not rattle when you drive.
Stowing the Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear of the vehicle, with the valve
stem side facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under
the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. If
equipped, you may have to remove
the wheel center cap prior to
pushing the retainer through the
center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the jack
tool from the inner side of the
wheel. Pull on the cable to align the
components at the end of the cable.
3. Assemble the jack handle and winch extension (as shown in
illustration), then insert the winch extension through the access hole
behind the third row seat and engage the winch.
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The wrench will become harder to turn
and the spare tire winch will ratchet or slip when the tire is raised to
maximum tightness. A clicking sound will be heard from the winch
indicating that the tire is properly stowed.
5. Disassemble the jack tool and winch extension and snap them back
into the tool tray.
1
3
5
4
6
2
Wheels and Tires 353
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
6. Reinstall the jack bag properly around the jack and tool assembly tray,
making sure the strap is securely fastened.
7. Close the access hole with the rubber plug.
8. Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and secure it with the wing nut
(turn clockwise until tight).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles
(160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as rotation, flat tire,
wheel removal).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
M14 x 1.5 150 200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
and mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.
354 Wheels and Tires
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 3.5L V6 EcoBoost
Cubic inches 214
Fuel Minimum 87 octane
Firing order 1–4–2–5–3–6
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap 0.030–0.033 inch (0.75 – 0.85 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0:1
DRIVEBELT ROUTING
1. The short drivebelt is on the first pulley groove closest to engine.
2. The long drivebelt is on the second pulley groove farthest from engine.
3.5L V6 EcoBoost engine
Capacities and Specifications 355
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Brake fluid
1
Between MIN and MAX
on reservoir
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM–1–C /
WSS-M6C65-A1
Hinges, latches, striker plates
and rotors, seat tracks, fuel
filler door hinge and spring
—Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)
Motorcraft XL-5
(aerosol) /
CRCSL3151ESB
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders — Motorcraft Penetrating
and Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Engine coolant
2
Base radiator with
auxiliary rear heat
18.5 qt (17.5L) Motorcraft Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B (U.S.) or
CVD-3DIL-B
(Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2
Heavy-duty trailer tow
radiator with auxiliary
rear heat
18.0 qt (17.0L)
Engine oil
3
6.0 qt (5.7L)
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30
Premium Synthetic
Blend Motor Oil or
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30
Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP or
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-A
356 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Automatic transmission
fluid
4,5
6R80
13.1 qt (12.4L)
Motorcraft
MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.)
or CXT-10-LV12
(Canada) /
MERCON LV
Front axle fluid
(Four wheel Drive) 3.5 pt (1.7L) Motorcraft SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle Lube
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Rear axle fluid
(9.75 inch axle)
6,7
Conventional
differential
4.5 pt (2.1 L) Motorcraft SAE 75W-85
Hypoid Gear Lube
XY-75W85-QL /
WSS-M2C942-A
Limited-slip differential
4.25 pt (2.01L)
Transfer case fluid
Four Wheel Drive with
Electronic Shift On the
Fly
1.6 - 1.8 qt (1.5-1.7L)
Motorcraft Transfer Case
Fluid
XL–12 /
ESP-M2C166-H
Four Wheel Drive with
Torque On Demand
1.5 qt (1.4L)
Motorcraft
MERCON LV
XT-10-QLVC (U.S.)
or CXT-10-LV12
(Canada) /
MERCON LV
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate with
Bitterant
ZC-32-B2 /
WSB-M8B16-A2
Capacities and Specifications 357
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
Fuel tank
Standard
28.0 gal (106.0L) ——
Expedition EL
33.5 gal (126.8L) ——
A/C Refrigerant
8
40 oz (1.13 kg) Motorcraft R134a
Refrigerant
YN-19 (U.S.) or
CYN-16–R (Canada)
/
WSH-M17B19-A
A/C Refrigerant Compressor
Oil
8
7 fl oz (207 ml)
Motorcraft PAG
Refrigerant Compressor
Oil
YN-12–D /
WSH-M1C231-B
1
Ford recommends using Motorcraft (Ford) DOT 3 High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid or
equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A1. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause
degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and
dry. Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
2
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
3
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Only use fluid that meets Ford
specification. Motor oils of the recommended viscosity grade that meet API SN requirements and display
the API Certification Mark for gasoline engines are also acceptable. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also displays the API Certification Mark.
An oil that displays the API Certification Mark conforms to current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee
(ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives in your engine. They are unnecessary and could lead to
engine damage that is not covered by your Ford warranty.
358 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name Ford part number /
Ford specification
4
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other
than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
5
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if
equipped with an in-tank cooler.
6
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated for life.
These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the
axle has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the axle has been
submerged in water.
7
Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent for complete refill of Ford limited
slip rear axles.
8
See the warning below:
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R–134a under high
pressure. Opening and air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury. Only
qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Capacities and Specifications 359
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT® PART NUMBERS
Component 3.5L engine
Air filter element FA-1883
Battery BXT-65-650 or BXT-65-750
(if equipped)
Oil filter FL-500-S
Spark plugs SP-534
Seat filter (if equipped) FS-104
Windshield wiper blade WW-2234 (front)
WW-1612 (rear)
Motorcraft replacement parts are recommended for scheduled
maintenance and are available at your Ford or Lincoln dealer or at
fordparts.com. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s
specifications, and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts
may impact vehicle performance, emissions, and durability. Your warranty
may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
Should a Motorcraft oil filter not be available, use an oil filter that meets
industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the
spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. Refer to scheduled
maintenance information for the replacement intervals.
360 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver’s side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Capacities and Specifications 361
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance
Certification Label be affixed to a
vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety
Compliance Certification Label shall
be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, the door latch post, or the
edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver’s seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
Six-speed automatic (6R80) 6
362 Capacities and Specifications
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact an authorized dealer or visit our online store at
www.Accessories.Ford.com (United States only).
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly authorized
dealer-installed Ford Genuine Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the defective accessories.
Ford Motor Company will warrant your accessory through the warranty
that provides the greatest benefit:
•24 months, unlimited mileage.
•The remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Hood deflector •Splash guards
•Side-window deflectors •Chrome exhaust tips
Interior style
•Ambient lighting •Floor mats
•Illuminated door sill plates •Cargo area protector
•Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Lifestyle
•Rear seat entertainment* •Roof crossbars
•Cargo organization and
management
•SUV camping tent*
•Racks and carriers* •Towing accessories
Peace of mind
•Remote start •Vehicle security systems
•Back up alarm* •Wheel locks
•Locking gas plug for capless fuel
system
•Warning sensors
•Vehicle cover*
*The accessory manufacturer designs, develops and therefore warrants
Ford Licensed Accessories, and does not design or test these accessories
Accessories 363
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed Accessories product limited
warranty from the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
•When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
•The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
•An authorized dealer needs to install mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if the manufacturer did not design the mobile
communication system specifically for automotive use.
•If you or an authorized Ford dealer add any non-Ford electrical or
electronic accessories or components to your vehicle, you may
adversely affect battery performance and durability. In addition, you
may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
364 Accessories
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Extended Service Plan
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS
WITH A FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Ford Extended Service Plan. It is the only extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides peace of mind
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage.
Ask your authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 1,000
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S. and Canada. It is the only extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company.
That means you get:
•Reliable, quality service at any Ford or Lincoln dealership
•Repairs performed by factory trained technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement transportation if your vehicle is at
your authorized dealer for same day covered repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are eligible for
rental car coverage, including bumper to bumper warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.
Extended Service Plan 365
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
•Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts
•Out of fuel and lock-out assistance
•Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car
•Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford Extended Service Plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner.
Whenever you sell your vehicle, prospective buyers may have a higher
degree of confidence that vehicle was properly maintained with Ford
ESP, thereby improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan
that covers all scheduled maintenance, and selected wear items. The
coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording your
vehicle’s maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select items that require periodic
attention for normal wear:
•Windshield wiper blades
•Spark plugs (except in California)
•The clutch disc
•Brake pads and linings
•Shock absorbers
•Belts and hoses
•Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment
Contact your selling authorized Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they
can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving
lifestyle and budget.
366 Extended Service Plan
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free installment payment plan. Just a 10%
down payment will provide you with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the security and benefits Ford ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are pre-approved with no credit
checks, no hassles! To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at
800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending
on the plan you purchase, Ford Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
•Rental reimbursement
•Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
•Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
•Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended Service Plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your
own driving needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental. When
you purchase Ford Extended Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout Canada and the United States,
provided by a network of participating authorized Ford Motor Company
dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For more information, visit your
local Ford of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended
Service Plan that is right for you.
Extended Service Plan 367
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
Distance and
strength
The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the audio
system muting.
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed 4.75-inch (12 centimeter)
audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels into
the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. You should use a permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. Ballpoint pens may damage
CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods.
368 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
•There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
•MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
•MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
•Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a specific
folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in the
current folder.
Audio System 369
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SIRIUS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Some features, such as Sirius satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with an authorized dealer.
A. Display screen: Shows audio and SYNC information.
370 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
B. Number block:
•In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When
tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound
returns.
•In CD mode, press a button to select a track.
•In phone mode, press the buttons to enter a phone number.
C. Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system
depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).
D. TUNE:
•In radio mode, turn to search the frequency band in individual
increments.
•In satellite radio mode, turn the control to tune to the next or
previous channel.
E. OK and arrow buttons:
•Press the up and down or left and right arrow buttons to browse
menu selections.
•Press OK to confirm menu selections.
F. Reverse and Fast Forward; AM/FM/CD Seek:
•In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that direction
to the next strong radio station or memory preset.
•In Sirius mode, press one of these buttons to select the previous or
next channel. If you select a specific category (such as Jazz, Rock or
News), use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the
selected category. Press and hold one of these buttons to move
quickly in that direction to the next channel or category.
•In CD mode, press one of these buttons to select the previous or next
track. Press and hold one of these buttons to move quickly in that
direction within the current track.
G. Power and Volume:
•Press this button to switch the system off and on.
•Turn it to adjust the volume.
H. CD slot: Insert a CD.
I. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
J. SOUND: Press this button to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Balance and Fade.
K. CLOCK: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center
arrow controls to change the hours and minutes.
Audio System 371
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
L. PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC
system. See the SYNC chapter for more information.
M. MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.
See Menu structure later in this section.
N. MUTE: or SIRIUS: Press this button to mute the playing audio, or if
equipped, listen to Sirius satellite radio.
O. AUX: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch
between devices you plug into the input jack or USB port. See Auxiliary
input jack later in this chapter.
P. RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio
frequency bands. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to
select different radio functions.
Q. CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.
Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some options may appear slightly
different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Press the left arrow to exit a
menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.
Radio Settings
Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available
channels.
Set Category Select to have the system search by certain
music categories (such as Rock, Pop or
Country).
RBDS/RDS Text Select to view additional broadcast data, if
available. This feature defaults to off. RBDS
must be on for you to set a category.
372 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SIRIUS
Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available
channels.
Show ESN Select to view your satellite radio electronic
serial number (ESN). You need this number
when communicating with Sirius to activate,
modify or track your account.
Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio
channels. Press OK toopenalistofthe
following options for this channel: Tune
Channel, Skip Channel or Lock Channel. Once
you skip or lock a channel, you can only access
it by pressing Direct and entering the channel
number. Locking or unlocking a channel
requires your PIN.
Set Category Select to view channel categories (such as
Pop, Rock or News). If you select a category,
seek and scan functions only stop on channels
in that category.
Alerts Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs,
artists or teams. The system alerts you when
the selection is playing on another channel.
Save up to 20 alerts.
Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked
stations.
Skip No Stations Remove the skip feature from all the channels
you previously skipped.
Parental Lock (PIN) Select to create a PIN, which allows you to
lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is
1234.
Audio System 373
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Audio Settings
Speed Compensated
Volume
Automatically adjusts the volume to
compensate for speed and wind noise. You can
set the system between 0 and +7.
Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble, Middle,
Bass, Fade and Balance.
Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen
seating position.
CD Settings
Scan All Select to scan all disc selections.
Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3
folder.
CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together
for a more consistent listening level.
Clock Settings
Set Time Select to set the time.
Set Date Select to set the calendar date.
24h Mode Select to view clock time in a 12–hour mode or
24–hour mode.
Display Settings
Dimming Select to change display brightness.
Language Select to display the language in English,
French or Spanish.
Temp. Setting Select to display the outside temperature in
Fahrenheit or Celsius.
374 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AM/FM/CD SONY AUDIO SYSTEM
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: The MyFord Touch system controls most of the audio features.
See the MyFord Touch chapter for more information.
A. TUNE: Turn this control to search through the radio frequency band
manually.
B. Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until
sound returns.
C. MEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as
AM, FM and A/V Input.
D. Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward:
•In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction.
•In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.
Audio System 375
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
E. VOL and Power:
•Press this button to switch the system off and on.
•Turn it to adjust the volume.
F. Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.
G. CD Slot: Insert a CD.
REAR AUDIO CONTROLS
Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat audio controls. This allows front
and middle seat passengers to simultaneously control the vehicle media
sources (radio, CD or SYNC).
A. VOL: Press this button to increase or decrease the volume of playing.
B. MEDIA: Press this button to scroll through available playing media,
such as AM, AM2, FM1, FM2, FM3, SAT1, SAT2, SAT3, CD, and SYNC
sources (USB, SD card, Bluetooth audio or Line in).
C. Rear audio display: See displayed time, radio frequency, Sirius radio
channel or CD track.
D. CLOCK: Press this button to display the time briefly. Press and hold
the button. to display the time until you release the button. You can
press the button to display the time even when the radio is off.
E. SEEK: Select the next or previous stored radio frequency station,
Sirius radio channel or CD track.
•In radio mode, press and release the button to go to the next or
previous memory preset. Press and hold the button to fast seek down
the radio frequency.
•In satellite radio mode, press and release the button to go to the next
or previous preset channel (in SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3). Press and hold
the button to fast seek down the channels.
•In CD and SYNC modes, press and release the button to go to the
next or previous track. Press and hold the button to fast reverse or
fast forward within that track.
A B C D E
376 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HD RADIO™ INFORMATION (IF AVAILABLE)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog
broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For
more information, and a guide to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio
technology, you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. When this
logo is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station
is broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers
signify available digital channels where new or different content is
available. HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through
HD7) are only available digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not scan for
HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo
appear if the station has a digital broadcast.
To save a multicast
station as a preset
When the channel is active on-screen, press
and hold a memory preset slot until the sound
returns. There is a brief mute while the radio
saves the station. Sound returns when
finished. When recalling a HD2 or HD3
memory preset, there is a mute before the
digital audio plays, as the system must once
again acquire the digital signal.
As with any saved radio station, you cannot
access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
Audio System 377
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2 through HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted
unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station
(aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it
first plays the station in the analog version.
Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the
shift from analog to digital sound or digital
back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to
report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting
with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each
station. These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issue Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease
in audio volume.
This is poor time
alignment by the radio
broadcaster.
No action required.
This is a broadcast
issue.
378 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Potential station issues
Issue Cause Action
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
No action required.
The reception issue
may clear up as you
continue to drive.
There is an audio
mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3,
multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
No action required.
This is normal
behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a
preset or from a direct
tune.
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
No action required.
The station is not
available in your
current location.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel
search.
No action required.
This is normal
behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.
Audio System 379
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
Sirius broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of Sirius satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in
the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at
1–888–539–7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
380 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Sirius Satellite Radio Service
Note: Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
Sirius satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed Sirius satellite
radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of Sirius satellite
radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account.
When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by pressing SIRIUS
and memory preset 1 at the same time. To access your ESN, press the
bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >Options.
Troubleshooting
Radio display Condition Possible action
Acquiring Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
system failure
There is an internal
module or system
failure present.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
an authorized dealer
for service.
Audio System 381
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Radio display Condition Possible action
Invalid Channel The channel is no
longer available.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does
not include this
channel.
Contact Sirius at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from
the Sirius satellite or
Sirius tower to your
vehicle antenna.
The signal is blocked.
When you move into
an open area, the
signal should return.
Updating Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Your satellite service is
no longer available.
Call Sirius at
1–888–539–7474 to
resolve subscription
issues.
None Found. Check
Channel Guide.
All the channels in the
selected category are
either skipped or
locked.
Use the channel guide
to turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that
station.
Subscription Updated Sirius has updated the
channels available for
your vehicle.
No action required.
382 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
moving. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden stop,
which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely
stored while your vehicle is moving.
The auxiliary input jack allows you
to connect and play music from
your portable music player through
your vehicle speakers. You can use
any portable music player designed
for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male
1
⁄
8
-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors
at each end.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the
auxiliary input jack.
LINE IN
Audio System 383
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You
should hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks and charge devices (if
supported). See the SYNC chapter
for more information.
LINE IN
384 Audio System
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located in the center console and has the following
features:
A. Auxiliary input jack
B. USB ports
C. SD card slot
For more information, see the MyFord Touch chapter.
Audio System 385
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
•Make and receive calls.
•Access and play music from your portable music player.
•Use 911 Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped).
•Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink™
(if applicable).
•Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands.
•Stream music from your connected phone.
•Text message.
•Use the advanced voice recognition system.
•USB device charging (if your device supports this).
386 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Make sure you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1–800–392–3673.
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports
online.
•Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites.
•Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available
for SYNC.
•Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so
they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
SYNC® 387
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage. See your device’s manual for further
information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized
dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device’s manual before using it with
SYNC.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a
profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This
profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread),
and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system
data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist, Vehicle Health
Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.
388 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the
display. Say any of the following:
Say: If you want to:
“Phone” Make calls.
“USB” Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio” Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in” Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel” Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC” Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings” Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.
*
“Services” Access the SYNC Services portal.
*
“Mobile apps” Access mobile applications.
*
“Help” Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*
If equipped, U.S. only.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
SYNC® 389
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say: The system:
“Interaction mode standard” Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
“Interaction mode advanced” Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your
request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that correct?”) If
turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested
and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
•After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
390 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
•At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
•Answering an incoming call
•Ending a call
•Using privacy mode
•Dialing a number
•Redialing
•Call waiting notification
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 1000 entries
per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK.
2. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
3. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC® 391
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system may
prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as the
primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect with first
upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say “Phone”. Say any of the following:
“PHONE”
“Call <name>”
1,2
“Call <name> on mobile OR cell”
1,2
“Call <name> on other”
1,2
“Phone book <name> at home”
2
“Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell”
2
“Call history outgoing”
2
“Phone book <name> on Other”
2
“Call history missed”
2
“Menu”
2,3
“Join”
392 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
“PHONE”
“Call <name> at home”
1,2
“Call <name> at work” OR “Call <name> in office”
1,2
“Dial”
1,4
“Phone book <name>”
2
“Phone book <name> at work” OR “Phone book <name> at office”
2
“Call history incoming”
2
“Connections”
2
“Go to privacy”
“Hold”
1
These commands do not require you to say “Phone” first.
2
These commands are not available until phone information is completely
downloaded using Bluetooth.
3
See “MENU” table below.
4
See “DIAL” table below.
“MENU”
“(Phone) connections”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification off”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification on”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer off”
*
“Battery”
“Phone name”
“Signal”
“Text message inbox”
*
Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system
to understand the command.
Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC® to access a phone book
name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to
view. Press the phone button and say “Call” to call the contact.
SYNC® 393
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one)
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” (pound)
“<number> 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted say:
1. Say “Call <name>” or “Dial”, then the desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete” or press the left arrow
button. To erase all spoken digits, say “Clear” or press and hold the left
arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
•Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
•Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
•Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the menu options.
394 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
To access:
1. Press MENU during an active call.
2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK.
3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select: You can:
Mute Call? Mute the call.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The
display indicates In Privacy and the system
transfers your call.)
Call Hold Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears.
To answer another call at this time, press the
phone button.
Join Calls Join two separate calls.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC
or use voice commands to place the second
call. Once actively in the second call, press
MENU.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press
OK. Press OK again when Join Calls?appears.
Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three
callers on a multiparty/conference call.
Enter Tones Enter “tones” such as numbers for passwords.
Scroll until the desired number appears in the
display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your phonebook contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button.
SYNC® 395
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Call History Access your call history log.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through
your call history options (incoming, outgoing
or missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the
selection.
Return Exit the current menu.
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
The SYNC phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911
Assist, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Phone Redial Redial the last number called (if available).
Press OK to select, then press OK again to
confirm.
Call History
1
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming,
Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed.
Press OK make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the
desired selection.
Note: The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phone book and call history
each time your phone connects to SYNC (if
the auto download feature is on and your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports
this feature).
396 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Phonebook
1,2
Allows you to access your downloaded
phonebook.
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your
phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there
are more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears,
then press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.
Text Message
1
Enables you to send, download and delete
text messages.
Phone Settings
1
Allows you to view your phone’s status, set
ring tones, select your message notification,
change phone book entries and automatically
download your cellular phone among other
features.
SYNC Services
3
Access the SYNC services portal where you
can request various types of information,
traffic reports and directions.
911 Assist
4
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for
you after an accident (if the feature is used
properly).
Vehicle Health
Report
3
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on
your vehicle.
Mobile Apps
3
Interact with SYNC-capable mobile
applications on your smartphone.
System Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Exit Phone Menu Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.
1
This is a phone-dependent feature.
2
This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3
If equipped, United States only.
4
If equipped, United States and Canada only.
SYNC® 397
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say “Read Message”
to have SYNC read the message to you.
2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and
the message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and
SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or
forward the message.
3. Press OK and scroll to choose between:
•Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll
through the list of pre-defined messages to send.
•Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to
anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose
Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
398 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and
SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text
messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and
phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
If you select Send Text Message?:
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart.
3. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system
now needs to know who to send the message to.
4. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can
also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number.
5. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific
contact.
6. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm
when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each
text message is sent with the following signature: “This message was
sent from my <Ford or Lincoln>”.
Pre-defined text message options
Can’t talk right now
Call me
Call you later
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Thanks
Where R you?
SYNC® 399
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Pre-defined text message options
I need more directions
I love you
Too funny
Can’t wait to see you
I’m stuck in traffic
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic
download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Phone Status See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Set Ringer Select which ring tone sounds during an
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear
Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone
Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
400 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Modify Phonebook Modify the contents of your phone book
(such as add, delete, download). Press OK to
select and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. Push the desired
contact(s) on your phone. See your phone’s
user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Auto Download Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Return Exit the current menu.
SYNC® 401
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the
menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in
this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
previously paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen,
then press OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a
time. When another phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
Set Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the
desired phone. Press OK to confirm.
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the
primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a
phone is selected as primary, it appears first
in the list and is marked with an asterisk (*).
402 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all
Bluetooth devices and deactivates all
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device Delete a paired phone.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones (and all
information originally saved with those
phones).
Press OK to select.
Return Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature.
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Prompts Get help from SYNC by using questions,
helpful hints or asking you for a specific
action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
SYNC® 403
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Languages Choose between English, Espanol and
Francais. Once selected, all of SYNC’s radio
displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. If you change the
language setting, the display indicates that
the system is updating. When complete, SYNC
takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (phonebook, call history, text messages
and paired devices) and return to the factory
default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates
when complete and SYNC takes you back to
the Advanced menu.
Install Application Install applications you have downloaded.
Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to
confirm.
System Info Access the Auto Version number as well as
the FPN number.
Press OK to select.
MAP Profile This is a Bluetooth component which can
further help your phone with the exchange of
text messages.
Return Exit the current menu.
404 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
•SYNC Services (if equipped, United States only): Provides access to
traffic, directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock
prices and more.
•911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
•Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, United States only): Provides a
diagnostic and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
911 Assist®
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
SYNC® 405
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your SYNC
equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by dialing
911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
•For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
•For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
Perform the following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display. Set
On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder. Off
with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display
reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
•SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
•SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
•A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
•The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United
States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
406 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial
911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
•The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
•The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
SYNC® 407
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (such as brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
•Vehicle Diagnostic Information
•Scheduled maintenance
•Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
•Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying “Vehicle health
report”, or pressing the phone button.
408 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
To run a report using the phone button:
1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report options
User Preferences:
Press OK to select
and enter the menu.
Scroll to select from:
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
or off. Select On to have SYNC automatically
prompt you to run a health report at certain
mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
Run Report? Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information.
Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you
do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report
profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle
Health Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for more
information.
SYNC® 409
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
(If Equipped, United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level and model year and may
require a subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn directions available
in select markets. Message and data rates may apply. Ford Motor
Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service
at any time without prior notification or incurring any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Using SYNC
with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note:
The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in
an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
410 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4.
Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say “Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Services appears in the display.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the Services menu. The display
indicates the system is connecting.
4. Press OK. SYNC initiates the call to the Services portal.
5. Once connected, follow the voice prompts to request your desired
Service, such as Traffic or Directions. You can also say “What are my
choices?” to receive a complete list of available services from which
to choose.
6.
To return to the Services menu, say “Services” or for help, say “Help”.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business search” and then “Search near
me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent
back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual
driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.
SYNC® 411
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
SYNC Services quick tips
Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt
a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a
sports report), wait for the listening tone, and
say your voice command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.
412 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SYNC AppLink™
Note: You must pair and connect your smartphone to SYNC to access
AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the phone to the USB port in order
to start the application. We recommend you lock your iPhone after
starting an application.
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped
with the MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch system.
Note: Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the
media menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app
is running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the phone button to access the SYNC phone menu on-screen.
2. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications.
3. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select
a particular app.
4. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
5. Select ⬙SYNC-Media⬙by pressing OK.
6. Scroll until ⬙<App Name> Menu⬙is displayed (such as, Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up and Thumbs down. For more information,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press the AUX button on the center console.
2. Press MENU to access the SYNC menu.
3. Select ⬙SYNC-Media⬙by pressing OK.
4. Scroll to Mobile Apps and press OK to access a list of available
applications.
5. Scroll through the list of available applications and press OK to select
a particular app.
6. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
SYNC® 413
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
7. Select ⬙SYNC-Media⬙by pressing OK.
8. Scroll until ⬙<App Name> Menu⬙is displayed (such as, Pandora
Menu), then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s
features, such as Thumbs up and Thumbs down. For more information,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say ⬙Mobile Apps⬙.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such as
⬙Play Station Quickmix⬙. Say ⬙Help⬙to discover available voice
commands.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over the
vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories,
such as artists or albums.
Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 6,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC also
supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, ensure that the
device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “USB”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands. See the media voice commands.
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK.
4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.
414 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
5. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected
device, Indexing may appear in the radio display. When indexing is
complete, the screen returns to the Play Menu.
6. Press OK and scroll through selections of:
•Play All
•Artists
•Albums
•Genres
•Playlists
•Tracks
•Explore USB
•Similar Music
•Return
When the desired selection appears in the display, press OK to build
your desired music selection.
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “USB” then any
of the following:
“USB”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album <name>”
1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist <name>”
1,3
“Play genre <name>”
1,3
“Play next folder”
2
“Play next track”
SYNC® 415
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
“USB”
“Play playlist <name>”
1,3
“Play previous folder”
2
“Play previous track”
“Play song <name>”
1,3
“Play track <name>”
1,3
“Refine album <name>”
1,3
“Refine artist <name>”
1,3
“Refine song <name>”
1,3
“Refine track <name>”
1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Search album <name>”
1,3
“Search artist <name>”
1,3
“Search genre <name>”
1,3
“Search song <name>”
1,3
“Search track <name>”
1,3
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“What’s playing?”
1
“<name>” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any
desired group, artist, etc.
2
Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.
3
Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
Voice command guide
“Autoplay” Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to play
any of your music until all media has all been
indexed. Indexing times can vary from device to
device and also with regard to the number of
songs being indexed.
416 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command guide
“Search/Play Genre” The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
“Similar Music” The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing from
the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
“Search/Play
Artist/Track/Album”
The system searches for a specific
artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
“Refine” This allows you to make your previous command
more specific. For example, if you asked to
search and play all music by a certain artist, you
could then say “refine album” and choose a
specific album from the list to view. If you then
select Play, the system only plays music from
that specific album.
Press the voice icon and when prompted say “Bluetooth Audio” and then
any of the following:
“BLUETOOTH AUDIO”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track ”
“Play previous track ”
SYNC® 417
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play
your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add,
connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Play Menu Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply, play
all. You can also choose to Explore USB to view
the supported digital music files on your playing
device.
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
Select Source SYNC USB: Press OK to access music plugged
into your USB port. You can also plug in devices
to charge them (if supported by your device).
Once connected, the system indexes any
readable media files. (The time required to
complete this depends on the size of the media
content being indexed.) If Autoplay is on, you
can access media files randomly as they are
indexed. If turned off, indexed media is not
available until the indexing process is complete.
SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of
average size media and notifies you if the
maximum indexing file size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio
: This is a phone-dependent
feature which allows you to stream music
playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone. If
supported by your device, you can press
SEEK to play the previous or next track.
SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play
music from your portable music player over the
vehicle’s speakers.
Note: If you have already connected a device to
the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require both
USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately.
418 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Media Settings Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and
select your Autoplay settings. Once these
selections are turned on, they remain on until
turned off. Press SEEK to play the previous or
next track.
Note: Some digital media players require both
USB and line in ports to stream data and music
separately. Press OK to select and then scroll to
choose from:
Shuffle
: Press OK to shuffle available media
files in the current playlist. Note: To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All in
the Play Menu and then select Shuffle.
Repeat
: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay
: Press OK to listen to music which
has already been randomly indexed during
the indexing process.
Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications
on your smart phone. See SYNC AppLink
earlier in this chapter for more information.
System Settings Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts, languages,
defaults, master reset, install application and
system information).
Note: See System Settings for more information.
Exit Media Menu Press OK to exit the media menu.
SYNC® 419
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
When you select: You can:
Play All Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time
in numerical order.
Press OK to select. The first track title
appears in the display.
Artists Sort all indexed media by artist. Once
selected, the system lists and then play all
artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are
less than 255 indexed artist, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are categorized in alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play
All Artists or any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and
press OK.
Albums Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any
individual indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and
press OK.
420 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Genres Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Press OK to select and then scroll to select
the desired genre and press OK.
Playlists Access your playlists (from formats such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists
your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, they are organized
into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired playlist and press OK.
Tracks Search for and play a specific track which has
been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes
them into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired track and press OK.
Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port. You
can only view media content which is
compatible with SYNC; other files saved are
not visible.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore
indexed media on your flash drive.
SYNC® 421
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile
a playlist for you.
Press OK to select. The system creates a new
list of similar songs and begins playing. The
metadata tags must be populated for this
feature to include each track.
Note: With certain playing devices, if your
metadata tags are not populated, the tracks
won’t be available in voice recognition, play
menu or similar music. However, if you place
these tracks onto your playing device in “Mass
Storage Device Mode”, they are available in
voice recognition, play menu browsing and
similar music. Unknowns are placed into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Return Exit the current menu.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a
device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
422 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
Allows you to pair additional devices to the
system.
1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device Delete a paired media device.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired devices.
Press OK to select.
Return Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature
SYNC® 423
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language,
performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select: You can:
Prompts Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful
hints or ask you for a specific action.
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Languages Choose from English, Francais and Espanol.
The displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the
display indicates that the system is updating.
When complete, SYNC takes you back to the
Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
424 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text
messages and all paired devices) and return
to the factory default settings.
Application Download new software applications (if
available) and then load the desired
applications through your USB port. See the
web site for more information.
Return Exit the current menu.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see
the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for
more information.
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
There is
excessive
background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person but
they cannot hear
me.
Possible phone
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device, removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC® 425
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
•Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the website.
The system says
Phonebook
Downloaded but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Limitations on
your phone’s
capability.
•Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
•If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
•Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated
with the missing contact.
426 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
phone to SYNC.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
•Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
•Update your device’s software
firmware.
•Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is
not working on
SYNC.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC® 427
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
USB and media issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble connecting
my device.
Possible device
malfunction.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
•Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
•Make sure that the device does
not have an auto-install program
or active security settings.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I turn
on the car.
This is a device
limitation.
Make sure you are not leaving the
device in your vehicle during very
hot or cold temperatures.
Bluetooth audio
does not stream.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•The device is
not connected.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that you
have pressed play on your device.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
•Your music files
may not contain
the proper artist,
song title, album
or genre
information, OR
•The file may be
corrupted, OR
•The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
•Make sure that all song details
are populated.
•Some devices require you to
change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
428 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions and
Information) issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I received a text
that the Vehicle
Health Report is
not activated.
•Your account
may not be
activated on the
website, OR
•You may have
the wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
•This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
•Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
I am unable to
retrieve the report
on the website, or
I receive a system
error.
The preferred
dealer information
did not load
correctly.
When you register your account,
you must list a preferred dealer. If
one is already listed, try selecting
another dealer and logging out.
Log back in and change it back to
your preferred dealer and retrieve
the report.
I am unable to
submit a report.
•This could be
due to your
phone’s
compatibility, OR
•Bad signal
strength, OR
•Your phone may
not be activated
on the website.
•Update your mobile number in
your account on the website.
•Make sure you have full signal
strength and that your Bluetooth
volume level has been turned up.
•Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
I heard a
commercial when I
tried to use
Traffic, Directions
and Information.
•The phone in
use is not
activated, OR
•Your phone has
ID blocker active.
•This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
•Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes
you by your phone number.
•Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same one
that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
SYNC® 429
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand what
I am saying.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may be
speaking too soon
or at the wrong
time.
•Review the Phone voice
commands and the Media voice
commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
•Be aware that the microphone
for SYNC is either in your rear
view mirror or in the headliner
just above the windshield.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song or
artist.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
•The system
may not be
reading the name
the same way you
are saying it.
•Review the media voice
commands at the beginning of
the media section.
•Say the song or artist exactly
as listed. If you say, “Play Artist
Prince”, the system does not
play music by Prince and the
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation.
•Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
“California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles”.
•If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
•Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
430 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
•Contacts in
your phonebook
may be very short
and similar, or
they may contain
special
characters, OR
•Your
phonebook
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.
•Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
the phone section.
•Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as listed. For
example, if a contact is saved as
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe
Wilson”.
•The system works better if
you list full names, such as “Joe
Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
•Do not use special characters
such as 123 or ICE, as the
system does not recognize them.
•If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
requires you to say, “Call
J-A-K-E”.
SYNC® 431
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
⬙Find New Apps,⬙
SYNC does not
find any
applications.
An AppLink
capable phone is
not connected to
SYNC.
•Ensure you have a compatible
smartphone; an Android with OS
2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS
or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
•Additionally, ensure your
phone is paired and connected
to SYNC in order to find
AppLink-capable apps on your
device. iPhone users must also
connect to SYNC’s USB port
with an Apple USB cable.
My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.
AppLink-enabled
apps are not
installed and
running on your
mobile device.
•Ensure you have downloaded
and installed the latest version
of the app from your phone’s
app store. Ensure the app is
running on your phone.
•Some apps require you to
register or login on the app on
the phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some may
have a ⬙Ford SYNC⬙setting, so
check the app’s settings menu
on the phone.
432 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I still
cannot find any
apps.
Sometime apps
do not properly
close and re-open
their connection
to SYNC, over
ignition cycles,
for example.
•Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle. On
an Android device, if apps have
an ⬙Exit’ or ’Quit’ option, select
that then restart the app.
•If the app does not have that
option, you can also manually
⬙Force Close⬙the app by going
to the phone’s settings menu,
selecting ’Apps.’ then finding the
particular app and choosing
’Force stop.’ Don’t forget to
restart the app afterwards, then
select ⬙Find New Apps⬙on
SYNC.
•On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double tab
the home button then swipe up
on the app to close it. Tab the
home button again, then select
the app again to restart it. After
a few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC’s Mobile
App’s Menu.
SYNC® 433
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.
There is a
bluetooth bug on
some order
versions of the
Android OS that
may cause apps
that were found
on your previous
vehicle drive to
not be found
again if you have
not turned off
bluetooth.
Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and then
turning Bluetooth back on. If
you are in your vehicle, SYNC
should be able to automatically
reconnect to your phone if you
press the ⬙Phone⬙button.
My iPhone phone
is connected, my
app is running, I
restarted the app
but I still cannot
find it on SYNC.
The USB
connection to
SYNC may need
to be reset.
Unplug the USB cable from the
phone, wait a moment, and plug
the USB cable back in to the
phone. After a few seconds, the
app should appear in SYNC’s
Mobile Apps Menu. If not,
⬙Force Close⬙the application
and restart it.
I have an Android
phone. I found
and started my
media app on
SYNC, but there
is no sound or
the sound is very
low.
The bluetooth
volume on the
phone may be
low.
Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by using
the device’s volume control
buttons which are most often
found on the side of the device.
434 SYNC®
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
AppLink issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
SYNC’s Mobile
Apps Menu.
Some Android
devices have a
limited number of
bluetooth ports
apps can use to
connect. If you
have more
AppLink apps on
your phone than
the number of
available
Bluetooth ports,
you will not see
all of your apps
listed in SYNC’s
mobile apps
menu.
Force close or uninstall the apps
you do not want SYNC to find. If
the app has a ⬙Ford SYNC⬙
setting, disable that setting in
the app’s settings menu on the
phone.
SYNC® 435
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
A. Phone
B. Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation)
C. Climate
D. Settings
E. Home
F. Information
G. Entertainment
AB
GC
DF E
436 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
This system uses a four-corner strategy to provide quick access several
vehicle features and settings. The touchscreen provides easy interaction
with your cellular phone, multimedia, climate control and navigation
system. The corners display any active modes within those menus, such
as phone status or the climate temperature.
Note: Some features are not available while your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature that allows you to access
and control audio features for 30 minutes after you switch the ignition
off (and no doors open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
•Making and Receiving Calls
•Quick Dial
•Phonebook
•Call History
•Text Messaging
•Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
•My Home
•Favorites
•Previous Destinations
•Point of Interest
•Emergency
•Street Address
•Intersection
•City Center
•Map
•Edit Route
•Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
•Driver Settings
•Recirculated Air
•Auto
•Dual
•Passenger Settings
•A/C
•Defrost
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 437
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following:
•Clock
•Display
•Sound
•Vehicle
•Settings
•Help
HOME
Press to access your home screen. Depending on your vehicle’s
option package and software, your screens may vary in
appearance from the descriptions in this section. Your features may also
be limited depending on your market. Check with your authorized dealer
for availability.
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
•SYNC Services
•Sirius Travel Link
•Alerts
•Calendar
•SYNC Apps
If the icon is yellow, see Alerts in the Information section of this
chapter.
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
•AM
•FM
•SIRIUS
•CD
•USB
•BT Stereo
•SD Card
•A/V In
438 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Using the Touchscreen
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the graphic with your finger. To
get the best performance from the touch-sensitive controls:
•Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
•Press firmly on the center of a control graphic or menu item.
•Keep metal and other conductive material away from the surface of
the touchscreen.
Using Your Audio and Climate Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may also have these
controls on your bezel:
•Power: Switch the media or climate features off and on.
•VOL: Control the volume of playing media.
•Seek and Tune: Use as you normally would in media modes.
•PRESETS: Press and hold a numbered button to store a radio or
Sirius station. Press to recall the stored station.
•Eject: Eject a CD from the entertainment system.
•Climate control: Control the temperature, fan speed and settings of
the climate control system.
•
MEDIA: Touch repeatedly to see all available media sources. If not on
an audio screen, the media change appears in the lower left status bar.
Using Your Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option package, you can use your
steering wheel controls to interact with the touchscreen system.
•VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
•VOICE: Press to start a voice session. Press again and hold to end a
voice session.
•SEEK and PHONE SEND:
•While in radio mode, press to seek between presets or press and
hold to seek between stations.
•While in USB or CD mode, press to seek between stations or press
and hold to fast seek.
•
While in phone mode, press to answer a call or switch between calls.
•SEEK and PHONE END:
•While in radio mode, press to seek between presets or press and
hold to seek between stations.
•While in USB or CD mode, press to seek between stations or press
and hold to fast seek.
•
While in phone mode, press to end a call or reject an incoming call.
See the Steering Wheel chapter for more information.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 439
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used for cleaning glasses. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth.
Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use detergent or
any type of solvent to clean the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1–800–392–3673.
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673.
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
When using SYNC:
•Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are
broken, split or damaged. Place cords and cables out of the way, so
they do not interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
•Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions
as it could cause them damage. See your device’s manual for further
information.
•Do not attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized
dealer.
For your safety, some SYNC functions are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device’s manual before using it with SYNC.
440 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too difficult to use while your
vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your vehicle is
stationary.
•Screens that are too crowded with information, such as Point of
Interest reviews and ratings, Sirius Travel Link sports scores, movie
times and ski conditions.
•Any action that requires you to use a keyboard is restricted, such as
entering a navigation destination or editing information.
•All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone
contacts or recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific examples:
Restricted Features
Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading
phonebook contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and
recent phone call entries
System Functionality Editing the keypad code
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or
Active Park Assist are active
Wi-Fi and Wireless Editing wireless settings
Editing the list of wireless networks
Videos, Photos and
Graphics
Playing video
Editing the screen’s wallpaper or adding new
wallpaper
Text Messages Composing text messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination
Demo navigation route
Adding or Editing Address Book entries or
Avoid Areas
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 441
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a
profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This
profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread),
and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system
data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist, Vehicle Health
Report, and Traffic, Directions and Information.
ACCESSING AND ADJUSTING MODES THROUGH YOUR RIGHT
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
The display is located on the right side of your instrument cluster. You
can use your steering wheel controls to view and make minor
adjustments to active modes without taking your hands off the wheel.
For example:
•In Entertainment mode, you can view what is now playing, change
the audio source (such as AM, FM and CD) and scroll through
memory presets.
•In Phone mode, you can accept or reject an incoming call, or make a
call by choosing from select menus within the Phone menu.
•If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, you can view the current
route or cancel a route.
442 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation, Compass appears
in the display instead of Navigation. If you press the right arrow to go
into the Compass menu, you can see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is traveling, not true direction.
(For example, if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of the compass
graphic displays west; north displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Audio Sources and Memory Presets
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel
to scroll through the available modes.
You can make selections from the menu by using the OK button. The
selection menu expands and different options appear.
•Press OK to enter the mode.
•Press the left or right arrows to make adjustments within the chosen
mode. Small white arrows appear in the menu you are in which
indicate that you can scroll in those directions to enter more menus.
•Press OK to confirm your selection.
Pressing the up and down arrow buttons in the current source screen
allows you to move through that source’s presets.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones,
prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation
and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses
to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may appear in the lower
left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (such as
Listening, Success, Failed, Paused or Try Again).
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 443
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
How to Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon. After the tone, speak your command
clearly.
These commands can be said at any time.
“Cancel”
“Exit”
“Go back”
“List of commands”
“Main menu”
“Next page”
“Previous page”
“What can I say?”
“Help”
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands for the current session, do one
of the following:
•During a voice session, press the Help icon (?) in the lower left status
bar of the screen.
•Say, “What can I say?” for an on-screen listing of the possible voice
commands associated with your current voice session.
•Press the voice icon. After the tone, say, “Help” to hear a list of
possible voice commands.
Helpful Hints
•Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
•After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
•Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
•At any time, you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
444 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Accessing a List of Available Commands
•If you use the touchscreen, press the Settings icon > Help >Voice
Command List.
•If you use the steering wheel control, press the voice icon. After the
tone, speak your command clearly.
Voice command list
“Audio list of commands”
“Bluetooth audio list of commands”
“Browse list of commands”
“CD list of commands”
“Climate control list of commands”
“List of commands”
“Navigation list of commands”
*
“Phone list of commands”
“Radio list of commands”
“SD card list of commands”
“Sirius satellite list of commands”
**
“Travel link list of commands”
*
“USB list of commands”
“Voice instructions list of commands”
“Voice settings list of commands”
“Help”
*
This command is only available when your vehicle is equipped with the
navigation system, and the navigation system SD card is in the card slot.
**
This command is only available when you have an active Sirius satellite
radio subscription.
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction,
help and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction that uses
candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the highest
level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 445
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Confirmation Prompts: The system uses these short questions to
confirm your voice request. If turned off, the system simply makes a best
guess as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally ask
you to confirm settings.
Phone/Media Candidate Lists: Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The system creates these lists when
it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command.
To access these settings using the touchscreen:
1. Press the Settings icon > Settings >Voice Control.
2. Select from:
•Interaction Mode
•Confirmation Prompts
•Media Candidate Lists
•Phone Candidate Lists
•Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice commands:
Press the voice icon. Wait for the prompt “Please say a
command”. Another tone sounds to let you know the system is
listening.
Voice settings using voice commands
“Interaction Mode Novice”
“Interaction Mode Advanced”
“Confirmation Prompts On”
“Confirmation Prompts Off”
“Phone Candidate Lists On”
“Phone Candidate Lists Off”
“Media Candidate Lists On”
“Media Candidate Lists Off”
“Help”
Using Voice Commands with the Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays a list of candidates generated
during a voice session. For example, when entering in a street address or
trying to call a contact from the phone you paired to the system.
446 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ENTERTAINMENT
A. AM 1 and AM AST
B. FM 1, FM 2 and FM AST
C. SIRIUS
D. CD
E. USB
F. Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as:
•SD Card
•BT Stereo
•A/V In
G. These buttons change with the media mode you are in.
H. Radio memory presets and CD controls.
Note: Some features may not be available in your area. Contact an
authorized dealer for more information.
You can access these options using the touchscreen or voice commands.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 447
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Browsing Device Content
When listening to audio on a device, you can browse through other
devices without having to change sources. For example, if you are
currently listening to audio on an SD card, you can browse all the artists
that are stored on your USB device.
Press the voice icon on the steering wheel. When prompted,
you can say:
“BROWSE” within devices
“Browse”
*
“Browse <league> games”
**
“Browse <Sirius category> channels”
**
“Browse Sirius channel guide”
**
“Browse SD card”
“Browse USB”
“Help”
*
If you have said “Browse”, you can then say any commands in the
following chart.
**
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to
Sirius satellite radio.
“BROWSE”
“<League> games”
*
”<Sirius category> channels”
*
“SD card”
**
“Sirius channel guide”
*
“USB”
**
“Help”
*
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius
satellite radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB mode, see the “SD card and
USB Port” section of this chapter.
For a complete list of “Browse” voice commands, see USB and SD card
voice commands and Bluetooth audio voice commands in the
following sections.
Your voice system allows you to change audio sources with a simple
voice command. For example, if you are listening to music on a USB
448 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
device, then want to switch to a satellite radio channel, simply press the
voice button on the steering wheel controls and say the name of the
Sirius station (such as, “the Highway”). The following voice commands
are available at the top level of the voice session no matter which
current audio source you are listening to (such as a USB device or Sirius
satellite radio). Note: This is only available when your MyFord Touch
system language is set to North American English.
“AM <530 - 1710>” “FM <87.9 – 107.9>”
“<530 - 1710>” “<87.9 – 107.9>”
“Sirius <0-223>”
*
“<Channel name>”
*
“Play [genre] <name>”
**
“Play [playlist] <name>”
**
“Play [artist] <name>”
**
“Play [song] <name>”
**
“Play [album] <name>”
**
“Play <name (song or album)> by
<artist name>”
“Play <name>” “Sports games”
*
*
This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to Sirius
satellite radio.
**
The commands that have[]around the word means that the word is
optional. For example, if you say, “Play Metallica”, this is the same as the
voice command, “Play [artist] <name>”.
AM and FM
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets, just touch the AM or
FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The light on the button
illuminates when the feature is on. HD Radio allows you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally, where available, providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station. The
light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 449
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
•Bass
•Midrange
•Treble
•Balance and Fade
•DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
•Occupancy Mode
•Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Set PTY for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music you
would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan for
the stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display allows you to view the information broadcast by FM
stations.
AST allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest
stations in your current location.
TAG Button is available when HD Radio is on, and allows you to tag a
song to download later. When you select On, TAG appears on-screen
when HD Radio is active. You can touch TAG to save the information of
the song that is playing. When you plug in your portable music player,
the information transfers, if supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs you
would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number. Touch
Enter when you are done.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog
broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. For
more information, and a guide to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
450 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio
technology, you may notice the following indicators on your screen:
HD) logo is grey when acquiring a digital station, and then
changes to orange when digital audio is playing. When this logo
is available, you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted numbers signify
available digital channels where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status and is available in analog and
digital broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only
available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature is on. To turn the feature on
and use it:
1. Press AM or FM >Options >TAG button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the song’s information and transfers
it to your portable music player (if supported) when you connect it
to the system. The system automatically transfers the tag to your
player (if already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the tags
appear to you as a reminder. The system allows you to tag up to
approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support tagging,
see www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
•Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio reception is on, although it does
not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if
the station has a digital broadcast.
•Memory presets allow you to save an active channel as a memory
preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when finished. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the
sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because the system has to
reacquire the digital signal.
•Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the
saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 451
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2 through HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted
unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station
(aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it
first plays the station in the analog version.
Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD
Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may
hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the
shift from analog to digital sound or digital
back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible experience, use the contact form to
report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting
with HD Radio technology. Independent entities own and operate each
station. These stations are responsible for making sure all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issue Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease
in audio volume.
This is poor time
alignment by the radio
broadcaster.
No action required.
This is a broadcast
issue.
452 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Potential station issues
Issue Cause Action
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
No action required.
The reception issue
may clear up as you
continue to drive.
There is an audio
mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3,
multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
No action required.
This is normal
behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a
preset or from a direct
tune.
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
No action required.
The station is not
available in your
current location.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
There is no text
information shown for
currently selected
frequency.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
HD2-HD7 stations not
found when Scan is
pressed.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel
search.
No action required.
This is normal
behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 453
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<87.9–107.9>” “FM preset <#>”
“<87.9–107.9> HD”
*
“FM1”
“<530–1710>” “FM 1 preset <#>”
“AM” “FM2”
“AM <530–1710>” “FM 2 preset <#>”
“AM autoset” “HD <#>”
*
“AM autoset preset <#>” “Preset <#>”
“AM preset <#>” “Radio off”
“FM” “Radio on”
“FM <87.9–107.9>” “Set PTY”
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”
*
“Tune”
**
“FM autoset” “Help”
“FM autoset preset <#>”
*
If available.
**
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<87.9–107.9>” “FM autoset”
“<87.9-107.9> HD <#>”
*
“FM autoset preset <#>”
“<530–1710>” “FM preset <#>”
“AM” “FM1”
“AM <530–1710>” “FM 1 preset <#>”
“AM autoset” “FM2”
“AM autoset preset <#>” “FM 2 preset <#>”
“AM preset <#>” “HD <#>”
*
“FM” “Preset <#>”
“FM <87.9–107.9>” “Help”
“FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>”
*
*
If available.
454 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Sirius Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, then select the
SIRIUS tab.
Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the channel. Sound returns
when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts
you when it plays again on any channel.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately
45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned to the current
station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
While in replay mode:
•Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song.
•Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the
current track.
•Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
•Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the
feature to replay audio.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
•Bass
•Midrange
•Treble
•Balance and Fade
•DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
•Occupancy Mode
•Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 455
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Set Category for Seek/Scan allows you to select a category of music
you would like to search for. You can then choose to either seek or scan
for the stations playing that category.
Parental Lockout allows you to lock and unlock channels, change or
reset your PIN or unlock all channels. To use this feature, you need your
initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts allows you to select Artists, Titles and Teams
that you would like the system to alert you to when they are playing on
other channels. Press Edit Alerts to delete or turn off alerts. You can
also set all alerts to on or off. When an alert appears on the screen, you
can choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel the alert or to Disable
Alerts. If you are listening to a sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so that the system can alert you when they are playing on a
satellite radio channel.
Note: Sirius does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is required when you need to
activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is on the
System Information Screen (SR ESN: XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your
ESN, press the bottom left corner of the touchscreen, then SIRIUS >
Options.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel
number. Touch Enter when you are done.
Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Scroll to see
more categories. Touch the station you want to listen to.
Touch Skip if you want to skip this channel.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel.
Touch Title or Artist to see song and artists on other stations.
456 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to Sirius satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to Sirius satellite radio, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Sirius”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“Sirius <0–223>” “SAT 3”
“<Channel name>” “SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Preset <#>” “SAT preset <#>”
“SAT” “Sirius off”
“SAT 1” “Sirius on”
“SAT 1 preset <#>” “Sports game”
*
“SAT 2” “Tune”
**
“SAT 2 preset <#>” “Help”
*
If you have said, “Sports game”, see the following “Sports game” chart.
**
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“SPORTS GAME”
“Tune to the <college name> game”
“Tune to the <team city> game”
“Tune to the <team city> <team name> game”
“Tune to the <team name> game”
“Help”
“TUNE”
“Sirius <0–223>”
“<Channel name>”
“Preset <#>”
“SAT”
“SAT 1”
“SAT 1 preset <#>”
“SAT 2”
“SAT 2 preset <#>”
“SAT 3”
“SAT 3 preset <#>”
“Help”
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 457
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Sirius Satellite Radio Information
Note: Sirius reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. eCos
is published under the eCos License.
Sirius satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed Sirius satellite
radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a list of Sirius satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at 1-888-539-7474.
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna
obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other materials as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based
broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
458 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Sirius troubleshooting tips
Radio display Condition Possible action
Acquiring... Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required. This
message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
system failure.
There is an internal
module or system
failure present.
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a fault.
See your authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel. The channel is no
longer available.
Tune to another channel
or choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel. Your subscription does
not include this
channel.
Contact Sirius at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the channel,
or tune to another
channel.
No Signal. The signal is lost from
the Sirius satellite or
Sirius tower to your
vehicle antenna.
The signal is blocked.
When you move into an
open area, the signal
should return.
Updating. Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474.
Your satellite service is
no longer available.
Contact Sirius at
1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
None Found. Check
Channel Guide.
All the channels in the
selected channels are
either skipped or
locked.
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or
Skip function on that
station.
Subscription Updated. Sirius has updated the
channels available for
your vehicle.
No action required.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 459
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CD
Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select
the CD tab.
You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder, if
applicable.
Repeat
Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks on the
disc or turn the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order, or
turn the feature off if already on.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information.
Options
Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
•Bass
•Midrange
•Treble
•Balance and Fade
•DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
•Occupancy Mode
•Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
Compression allows you to turn the compression feature on and off.
Browse
Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks.
460 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“CD”
“Pause” “Repeat off”
“Play” “Repeat track”
“Play next track” “Shuffle”
“Play previous track” “Shuffle CD”
*
“Play track <1–512>” “Shuffle folder”
*
“Repeat” “Shuffle off”
“Repeat folder”
*
“Help”
*
This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card Slot
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, press
the card in and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull the card to
remove it as this could cause damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this card slot. See Navigation
system later in this chapter for more information.
The slot is located either in the center
console or behind a small access door in
the instrument panel. To access and play
music from your card, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen, and then select
SD Card from the list on the left side of
the screen.
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C,
LLC.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 461
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
USB Port
The ports are located either in the center
console or behind a small access door in
the instrument panel. To access and play
music from your device, press the lower
left corner of the touchscreen, and then
select the USB tab.
This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices, memory sticks,
flash drives or thumb drives, and charge devices if they support this
feature.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up to 30,000 songs.
Insert your device and select the SD Card or USB tab once the system
recognizes it. You can then select from the following options:
Repeat replays the currently playing song or album.
Shuffle plays music on the selected album or folder in random order.
Similar Music allows you to choose music similar to what is currently
playing.
More Info displays information such as current track, artist name,
album and genre.
Options allows you to view and adjust various media settings.
•Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for:
•Bass
•Midrange
•Treble
•Balance and Fade
•DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
•Occupancy Mode
•Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
•Media Player Settings allows you to select more settings, which is
under Media Player. See Settings.
•Device Information displays software and firmware information
about the currently connected media device.
•Update Media Index indexes your device each time you connect it
to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all
media on the device.
462 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Browse allows you to view the contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, such as genre, artist or album.
If you want to view song information such as Title, Artist, File, Folder,
Album, and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also touch What’s Playing to hear how the system pronounces
the current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request.
SD Card and USB Voice Commands
If you are listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the
voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a USB device or an SD card, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “USB” or “SD card”, then any of the
commands in the following chart.
“USB” or “SD CARD”
“Browse”
*
“Play previous song”
“Next” “Play similar music”
“Pause” “Play song <name>”
“Play” “Play TV show <name>”
**
“Play album <name>” “Play TV show episode <name>”
**
“Play all” “Play video <name>”
**
“Play artist <name>” “Play video podcast <name>”
**
“Play audiobook <name>” “Play video podcast episode
<name>”
**
“Play author <name>” “Play video playlist <name>”
**
“Play composer <name>” “Previous”
“Play folder <name>” “Repeat all”
“Play genre <name>” “Repeat off”
“Play movie <name>”
**
“Repeat one”
“Play music video <name>”
**
“Shuffle”
“Play next song” “Shuffle off”
“Play playlist <name>” “What’s this?”
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 463
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
“USB” or “SD CARD”
“Play podcast <name>” “Help”
“Play podcast episode <name>”
*
If you have said you would like to browse your USB or SD card, the
system prompts you to specify what you would like to browse. When
prompted, see the following “Browse” chart.
**
This command is only available in USB mode and are
device-dependent.
“BROWSE”
“Album <name>” “All video podcasts”
*
“All albums” “All videos”
*
“All artists” “Artist <name>”
“All audiobooks” “Audiobook <name>”
“All authors” “Author <name>”
“All composers” “Composer <name>”
“All folders” “Folder <name>”
“All genres” “Genre <name>”
“All movies”
*
“Playlist <name>”
“All music videos”
*
“Podcast <name>”
“All playlists” “TV show <name>”
*
“All podcasts” “Video <name>”
*
“All songs” “Video playlist <name>”
*
“All TV shows”
*
“Video podcast <name>”
*
“All video playlists”
*
“Help”
*
This command is only available in USB mode and are device-dependent.
Supported Media Players, Formats and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player, including
iPod®, Zune™, plays from device players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device
by metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are descriptive software
identifiers embedded in the media files, provide information about the
file.
464 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If your indexed media files contain no information embedded in these
metadata tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata tags as
Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod® or iPhone®, (if compatible),
you MUST have a special combination USB/RCA composite video cable
(which you can buy from Apple®). When the cable is connected to your
iPod® or iPhone®, plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the
USB port.
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio over your vehicle’s speakers from
your connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
To access, press the lower left corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT Stereo tab.
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
“Next song”, “Pause”, “Play” or “Previous song”.
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Bluetooth Audio”, then “Next song”,
“Pause”, “Play” or “Previous song”.
Line In (Auxiliary Input Jack)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while your vehicle is
moving.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 465
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when your vehicle is
in motion. Hard objects may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension
cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while your vehicle is moving.
The auxiliary input jack allows you to
connect and play music from your
portable music player through your
vehicle speakers. You can use any portable
music player designed for use with
headphones. Your audio extension cable
must have male
1
⁄
8
-inch (3.5 millimeter)
connectors at each end.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and portable music player. Set the
parking brake and put the transmission in position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the
auxiliary input jack.
3. Switch the radio on. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its
maximum level.
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You
should hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
Troubleshooting
•Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. The jack
only works correctly with devices that have a headphone output with
a volume control.
•Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio as this causes
distortion and reduces sound quality.
•If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the
portable music player volume down. If the problem persists, replace or
recharge the batteries in the portable media player.
•Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack does not provide control (such
as Play or Pause) over the attached portable media player.
466 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
PHONE
A. Phone
B. Quick Dial
C. Phonebook
D. History
E. Messaging
F. Settings
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. Once you pair
your phone, you can access many options using the touchscreen or voice
commands. While the system supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most
cellular phones with Bluetooth wireless technology support the following
functions:
•Answering an incoming call
•Ending a call
•Using privacy mode
•Dialing a number
•Redialing
•Call waiting notification
•Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
A
B
C
D
E
F
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 467
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
The first thing you must do to use the phone features of SYNC is to pair
your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with SYNC. This allows you to use
your phone in a hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition
and the radio.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left corner of the touchscreen. Find
SYNC appears on the screen and instructs you to begin the pairing
process from your device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your phone’s manual if necessary.
•Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
3. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on
the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, confirm that the PIN
provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information on
your phone’s capability, see your phone’s manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in position P. Turn on your vehicle ignition
and the radio.
1. Press the Phone corner of the touchscreen > Settings >BT
Devices >Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cellular phone is
in the proper mode. See your phone’s manual if necessary.
•Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
3. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not
support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on
the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
468 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
4. When prompted on your phone’s display, confirm that the PIN
provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone options. For more information
on your phone’s capability, see your phone’s user guide and visit the
website.
Making Calls
Press the voice button on your steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say, “Call <name>” or say “Dial”, then the desired
number.
To end the call or exit phone mode, press this phone button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone sounds. Call information
appears in the display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing Accept on the touchscreen or by
pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Reject the call by pressing Reject on the touchscreen or by
pressing this phone button on your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your touchscreen to select from the
following options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a
number and place a call. During an active call, you can also choose to:
•Mute the call
•Put it on hold
•Turn on privacy (returns the call to your cellular phone)
•Join two calls
•End the call.
Quick Dial
Set up favorite contacts from your phonebook or history folder.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 469
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously
downloaded phone book. The system places the entries in alphabetical
categories summarized at the top of the screen.
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this feature,
press Phone >Settings >Manage Phonebook >Download photos
from Phonebook >On.
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to SYNC, you can
access any previously dialed, received or missed calls. You can also
choose to save these to your Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone does not support
downloading call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps track of calls made
with the SYNC system.
Messaging
Send text messages using your touchscreen. See Text messaging later in
this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone settings, such as turning
Bluetooth on and off, managing your phonebook and more. See Phone
settings later in this section.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are speed-dependent and not
available when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages using Bluetooth, read them
aloud and translate text messaging acronyms, such as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
•Listen (speaker icon)
•Dial
•Send Text
•View
•Delete.
470 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It is unavailable when your
vehicle is traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging >Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from your phone book.
4. You can select from the following options:
•Send which sends the message as it is.
•Edit Text allows you to customize the pre-defined message or
create a message on your own.
You can then preview the message, verify the recipient as well as update
the message list.
Pre-defined text message options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen
displays a pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your
phone. You can press:
•View to view the text message.
•Listen for SYNC to read the message to you.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 471
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
•Dial to call the contact.
•Ignore to exit the screen.
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph
(5 km/h), the system offers to read the message to you instead of
allowing you to view it while driving.
Phone Settings
Press Phone >Settings.
Bluetooth Devices
Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as
save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth
Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go directly to your voice mail and
not ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
911 Assist
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See 911 Assist in the SYNC
Services and Applications section.
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call. Choose
from possible system ring tones, your currently paired phone’s ring tone,
a beep, text-to-speech or a silent notification.
Text Message Notification
Select a text message notification, if supported by your phone. Choose
from possible system alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.
Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your internet data
connection. Select to make your connection profile with the personal
area network or to turn off your connection. You can also choose to
adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect
when roaming or query on connect. Press ?for more information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
472 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert you when your phone is in
roaming mode.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel control. After the
tone, say any of the following commands:
“PHONE”
“Call” “Join calls”
*
“Call <name>” “Listen to text message <#>”
“Call <name> at home” “Listen to text messages”
“Call <name> at work” “Messages”
**
“Call <name> on cell” “Mute call”
*
“Call <name> on other” “Pair phone”
“Call voicemail” “Privacy on”
*
“Dial” “Read text message”
“Do not disturb off” “Reply to text messages”
“Do not disturb on” “Turn ringer off”
“Forward text messages” “Turn ringer on”
“Go to hands free”
*
“Unmute call”
*
“Hold call off”
*
“Help”
“Hold on”
*
*
This command is only available during an active call.
**
If you have said “Messages”, see the following “Messages” chart.
“MESSAGES”
“Call”
“Forward text messages”
“Listen to text message <#>”
“Listen to text messages”
“Reply to text messages”
“Help”
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 473
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
INFORMATION
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Under the Information menu, you can access features, such as:
A. SYNC Services
B. Sirius Travel Link
C. Alerts
D. Calendar
E. SYNC Applications.
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level and model year and may
require a subscription. Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn directions available
in select markets. Message and data rates may apply. Ford Motor
Company reserves the right to change or discontinue this product service
at any time without prior notification or incurring any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation before use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See Phone
earlier in this chapter for pairing instructions.
A
B
C
D
E
474 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note:
The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing
so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in
an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of
errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect your vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request, for continuous improvement, the service may collect and record
call details and voice communications. For more information, see SYNC
Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not
want Ford or its service providers to collect your vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not subscribe or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls.
1. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can also
say, “What are my choices?” to receive a list of available services
from which to choose.
3. Say, “Services” to return to the Services main menu or for help, say,
“Help”.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 475
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Touchscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Services.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
2. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can also
say, “What are my choices?” to receive a list of available services
from which to choose.
3. Say, “Services” to return to the Services main menu or for help, say,
“Help”.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
Search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business Search” and then “Search Near
Me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location, you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. The system may prompt you to speak with
an operator when it has difficulty matching your voice request. The
live operator can assist you by searching for businesses by name or
by category, residential addresses by street address or by name or
specific street intersections. Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more information on Operator
Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your Destination. After the route
download is finished, the phone call automatically ends.
If your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation:
•Turn-by-turn directions appear in the information display, in the
status bar of your touchscreen system and on the SYNC Services
screen. You also receive driving instructions from audible prompts.
•
When on an active route, you can select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls or voice commands to view the
Route Summary Turn List or the Route Status ETA. You can also
turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the route or update the route.
476 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and the system delivers a new
route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, SYNC Services downloads
your requested destination to the navigation system. The navigation
system then calculates the route and provides driving instructions. See
the Navigation system section for more information.
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
SYNC Services quick tips
Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points, such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams,
such as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You
can learn more about personalization by
logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while
connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt a
voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a
sports report) and say your voice command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 477
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SYNC Services Voice Commands
When a route has been downloaded (non-navigation systems),
press the voice button on the steering wheel control. When
prompted, say any of the following commands:
“SERVICES”
“Cancel route”
“Navigation voice off”
“Navigation voice on”
“Next turn”
“Route status”
“Route summary”
“Services”
“Update route”
“Help”
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped and If Activated)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, crash and injury. We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off
the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while
driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped
with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and click on Coverage map and
details for a complete listing of all traffic areas covered by Sirius Travel
Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible for any errors or
inaccuracies in the Sirius Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
478 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link, it can help you locate the best
gas prices, find movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions and see scores to current
sports games.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite places, if
programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s
location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if
available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the
five day forecast for the chosen area. Select Map to see the weather
map, which can show storms, radar information, charts and winds. Select
Area to select from a listing of weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports.
You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier access. The score
automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 479
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your vehicle must be equipped
with navigation and your navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot.
Press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and, when
prompted, say any of the following:
Travel Link voice commands
“5–day weather forecast” “Sports scores”
*
“Fuel prices” “Traffic”
“Movie listings” “Travel Link”
**
“Sports headlines”
*
“Weather”
“Sports schedule”
*
“Weather map”
*
If you have said, “Sports headlines”, “Sports schedule” or “Sports
scores”, you may say any of the commands in the “Sports headlines,
Sports schedules and Sports scores” commands chart:
**
If you have said, “Travel Link”, you may say any of the commands in
the “Travel Link” chart:
Sports headlines, sports schedules and sports scores voice
commands
“Baseball” “My teams”
“College basketball” “NBA”
“College football” “NFL”
“Golf” “NHL”
“MLS” “WNBA”
“Motor sports”
“TRAVEL LINK”
“5–day weather
forecast”
“Golf schedule” “NBA scores”
“Baseball headlines” “MLS headlines” “NFL headlines”
“Baseball schedule” “MLS schedule” “NFL schedule”
“Baseball scores” “MLS scores” “NFL scores”
“College basketball
headlines”
“Motor sports” “NHL headlines”
480 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
“TRAVEL LINK”
“College basketball
schedule”
“Motor sports order” “NHL schedule”
“College basketball
scores”
“Motor sports
schedule”
“NHL scores”
“College football
headlines”
“Movie listings” “Traffic”
“College football
schedule”
“My team headlines” “Weather”
“College football
scores”
“My teams schedule” “Weather map”
“Fuel prices” “My teams scores” “WNBA headlines”
“Golf headlines” “NBA headlines” “WNBA schedule”
“Golf leaderboard” “NBA schedule” “WNBA scores”
Alerts
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any of the following services:
•View the message.
•Delete the message.
•Delete All messages.
This screen displays any system messages (such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any messages by turning the information
icon yellow. After you read or delete the messages, the icon returns to
white.
Calendar
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current calendar by day, week or
month.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 481
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
911 Assist® (If Equipped)
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on before a
crash, the system will not dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time, which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in your
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or damaged in a crash.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the
phone, which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make sure that you read the 911
Assist privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off, that setting applies for all
paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice message plays or
a display message (or icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle is
started after a previously paired phone connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes knee airbags and rear inflatable
safety belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
You can learn more about the 911 Assist feature, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
•For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
•For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
482 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Setting 911 Assist On
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Apps >911 Assist, >On.
You can also access 911 Assist by:
•Pressing the Settings icon > Settings >Phone >911
Assist, or
•Pressing the Settings icon > Help >911 Assist.
To Make Sure that 911 Assist Works Properly
•SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
•The 911 Assist feature must be set on before the incident.
•You must pair and connect a Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone
to SYNC.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
•A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
•
The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the United
States, Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off (which
would trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to contact emergency
services if 911 Assist triggers. If a connected phone sustains damage or
loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to connect to, any
available previously paired phone and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
•SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
•SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC makes a successful call, a
pre-recorded message plays for the 911 operator, and then the occupant(s)
in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 483
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
911 Assist May Not Work If
•Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware sustains damage in a
crash.
•The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
•The phones(s) previously paired or connected to the system are
thrown from the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose to emergency services that
your vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other details about your vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, United States Only)
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace, normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems electronically monitored by your
vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other system,
(such as brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may apply when making a report.
484 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health Report contains valuable
information, such as:
•Vehicle Diagnostic Information
•Scheduled maintenance
•Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
•Items noted during vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer that
still need servicing.
Making a Report
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access these features. If your vehicle is
not equipped with Navigation, touch the corner of the
touchscreen with the green tab.
If you want to run a report by using the touchscreen, touch Apps >
Vehicle Health Report.
To run a report by voice command, press the voice button on
the steering wheel and, when prompted, say “Vehicle health
report”.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may
collect your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect more vehicle information. Ford
may use your vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you do
not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle information,
do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement) for more
information.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 485
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SETTINGS
A. Clock
B. Display
C. Sound
D. Vehicle
E. Settings
F. Help
Under this menu, you can set your clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle settings as well as access settings for
specific modes or the help feature.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for
you.
Note:
If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire
a GPS signal to update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it
may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time.
1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press +and −to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments, such as 12– or
24–hour mode, activate GPS time synchronization and have the system
automatically update for new time zones.
You can also turn the outside air temperature display on and off. It
appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next to the time and date.
The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings.
A
B
C
D
E
F
486 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display through the touchscreen or by
pressing the voice button on your steering wheel controls and when
prompted, say, “Display settings”.
Press the Settings icon > Display, to access and make
adjustments using the touchscreen.
•Brightness allows you to make the screen display brighter or
dimmer.
•Auto DIM, when set to On, lets you use the Auto Dim Manual Offset
feature. When set to Off, screen brightness does not change.
•Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the
system automatically change based on the outside light level, or turn
the display off.
•If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you have the options of turning
the display’s Auto Dim feature on or off and changing the Auto
Dim Manual Offset feature.
•Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you to adjust screen dimming as
the outside lighting conditions change from day to night. This feature
also allows you to adjust screen brightness using the instrument panel
dimming control.
Edit Wallpaper
•You can have your touchscreen display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from your camera. You must
access the photos either from your USB mass storage device or from an
SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large dimensions (such as 2048 x
1536) may not be compatible and appear as a blank (black) image on the
display.
Your system allows you to upload and view up to 32 photos.
To access, press the Settings icon > Display >Edit Wallpaper, and
then follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.
Only the photograph(s), which meets the following conditions, display:
•Compatible file formats are as follows: .jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp.
•Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
•Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 487
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Sound
Press the Settings icon > Sound, then select from the
following:
Sound Settings
Bass DSP
*
Midrange Occupancy Mode
*
Treble Speed Compensated Volume
Set Balance and Fade
*
If equipped.
Vehicle
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle, then select from the
following:
•Ambient Lighting.
•Vehicle Health Report.
•Door Keypad Code.
•Camera Settings.
•Enable Valet Mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When activated, ambient lighting illuminates footwells and cupholders
with a choice of colors. To access and make adjustments:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the power button.
Vehicle Health Report
Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and set the mileage interval at
which you would like to receive the reports. Press ?for more information
on these selections.
When done making your selections, press Run Vehicle Health Report
Now if you want your report.
Door Keypad Code
To change the keypad code for your keyless entry keypad system:
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >Door Keypad Code.
2. Enter your current factory code, then, when prompted, enter your
new code.
488 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Camera Settings
This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera.
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >Camera Settings, then select from
the following settings:
•Enhanced Park Aids.
•Rear Camera Delay.
Enable Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system. No information is accessible
until the system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >Enable Valet Mode.
2. Enter a four-digit pin twice, as prompted.
After you press Continue, the system locks until you enter the PIN again.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to reset the PIN, enter 3681 and
the system unlocks.
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice features, as well as phone,
navigation and wireless settings.
System
Press the Settings icon > Settings >System, then select from
the following:
System
Language Select to have the touchscreen display in
English, Spanish or French.
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or
Fahrenheit.
System Prompt
Volume
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the
system.
Touch Screen Button
Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm
choices made through the touchscreen.
Touch Panel Button
Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm
button choices made through the climate or
audio system.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 489
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
System
Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in
QWERTY or ABC format.
Install Applications Install any downloaded applications or view
the current software licenses.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases
all personal settings and personal data.
Voice Control
Press the Settings icon > Settings >Voice Control, then
select from the following:
Voice control
Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more
detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced
mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation
Prompts
Have the system ask you short questions if it
has not clearly heard or understood your
request.
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned
off, the system may occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
Media Candidate
Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your
voice commands. The system simply makes a
best guess at your request with these turned
off.
Phone Candidate
Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your
voice commands. The system simply makes a
best guess at your request with these turned
off.
Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system’s voice
volume level.
490 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Media Player
Press the Settings icon > Settings >Media Player, then select
from the following:
Media player
Autoplay When this feature is on, the system
automatically switches to the media source
upon initial connection. This allows you to
listen to music during the indexing process.
When this feature is off, the system does not
automatically switch to the inserted media
source.
Bluetooth Devices Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a
device. You can also set a device as your
favorite so that the system automatically
attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Gracenote Database
Info
This allows you to view the version level of
the Gracenote Database.
Gracenote
Management
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database
supplies metadata information for your music
files. This overrides information from your
device. This feature defaults to off.
Cover Art Priority With this feature on, the Gracenote Database
supplied cover art for your music files. This
overrides any art from your device. This
feature defaults to Media Player.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 491
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Navigation
Press the Settings icon > Settings >Navigation, then select
from the following:
Navigation
Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off.
Have the system display your turn list top to
bottom or bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Route Preferences Preferred Route allows you to choose to
have the system display the Shortest,
Fastest or most Ecological route first. If you
set Always Use Preferred Route to Yes,
the system uses the selected route type to
calculate only one route to the desired
destination. Always Use Preferred Route
bypasses route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates one
route based on the preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low,
medium or high cost for the calculated Eco
Route. The higher the setting, the longer the
time allotment is for the route.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle
lanes.
Navigation
Preferences
Have the system use guidance prompts.
Have the system automatically fill-in
State/Province information.
492 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Navigation
Traffic Preferences Have the system display areas where
roadwork occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult
driving conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow
and ice on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be
reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic
announcements.
Have the system avoid traffic problems
automatically.
Switch traffic alert notifications on and off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Avoid Areas Enter specific areas that you would like to
avoid on planned navigation routes.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 493
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Phone Settings
Press the Settings icon > Settings >Phone, then select from
the following:
Phone
Bluetooth Devices Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device,
as well as save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on and off.
Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail
and not ring inside your vehicle. With this
feature turned on, text message notifications
are also suppressed and do not ring inside
your vehicle.
911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature.
See 911 Assist in the SYNC applications
and services section.
Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls
- ring tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be
silent.
Text Message
Notification
Select the type of notification for text
messages - alert tone, beep, text to speech, or
have it be silent.
Internet Data
Connection
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust
your internet data connection. Select to make
your connection profile with the personal area
network or to turn off your connection. You
can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never
connect when roaming or query on connect.
Press ?for more information.
Manage Phonebook Access features, such as automatic phonebook
download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or
upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming
mode.
494 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that creates a wireless network within
your vehicle, thereby allowing other devices (such as personal computers
or phones) in your vehicle to speak to each other, share files or play
games. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone in your vehicle can also gain
access the internet if you have a USB mobile broadband connection
inside your vehicle, your phone supports personal area networking and if
you park outside a wireless hotspot.
Press the Settings icon > Settings >Wireless & Internet,
then select from the following:
Wireless & Internet
Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the
Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make
sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to
use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority
and signal strength. You can also choose to
search for a network, connect to a network,
disconnect from a network, receive more
information, prioritize a network or delete a
network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes
SYNC an access point for a phone or a
computer when turned on. This forms the
local area network within your vehicle for
things, such as game playing, file transfer and
internet browsing. Press ?for more
information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows
you to view and change settings for using
SYNC as the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List
allows you to view recent connections to your
Wi-Fi system.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 495
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Wireless & Internet
USB Mobile
Broadband
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also
use a USB mobile broadband connection to
access the internet. (You must turn on your
mobile broadband device on your personal
computer before connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your
typical area for your USB mobile broadband
connection. (USB mobile broadband settings
may not display if the device is already on.)
You can select the following: Country, Carrier,
Phone Number, User Name and Password.
Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as
well as giving you your typical Bluetooth
options to connect, disconnect, set as favorite,
delete and add device. Bluetooth is a
registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Prioritize
Connection Methods
Choose your connection methods and change
them as needed. You can select to Change
Order and have the system either always
attempt to connect using a USB mobile
broadband or using Wi-Fi.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
496 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Help
Press the Settings icon > Help, then select from the following:
Help
Where Am I? View your vehicle’s current location, if your
vehicle is equipped with navigation. If your
vehicle is not equipped with navigation, nothing
displays.
System Information Touchscreen system serial number.
Your vehicle identification number (VIN).
Touchscreen system software version.
Navigation system version.
Map database version.
Sirius satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN).
Gracenote Database Information and Library
version.
Software Licenses View the licenses for any software and
applications installed on your system.
Driving Restrictions Certain features are not accessible when your
vehicle is moving.
911 Assist Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See
911 Assist in the SYNC applications and
services section.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Speed Dial
allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE
contacts for quick access if there is an
emergency. Select Edit to access your
phonebook and then select the desired contacts.
The numbers then appear as options on this
screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The
ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the
911 Assist call process.
Voice Command List View categorized lists of voice commands.
To access Help using the voice commands, press the voice button, then,
after the tone, say “Help”. The system provides allowable voice
commands for the current mode.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 497
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CLIMATE
Touch the lower right corner on the touchscreen to access your climate
control features. Depending on your vehicle line and option package,
your climate screen may look different from this screen.
Note: You can switch temperature units between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
See Settings in this chapter.
A. Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching
off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering the
vehicle.
B. Passenger settings:
•Touch the +or –to increase or decrease the air temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
•Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if
equipped).
•Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the
climate-controlled seat off and on (if equipped).
•Touch DUAL to switch separate passenger side temperature controls
off and on. When you switch off DUAL, the passenger side
temperature changes to match the driver side temperature.
Note: The passenger side temperature and the DUAL indicator
automatically turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature
control.
A
LB
KC
J I H G FED
498 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
C. Fan speed: Touch +or -to increase or decrease the volume of air
circulated in your vehicle.
Note: When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically, all
the fan speed indicators turn off.
D. Rear: Touch to access the rear climate control. Rear climate control
settings appear at the bottom of the screen.
•Touch the power icon to turn the rear climate control functions off
and on.
•Touch Rear Control to allow the rear seat passengers to adjust the
rear climate settings. Touch it again to prevent the rear seat
passengers from adjusting the settings. Rear Control automatically
turns off when you use the touchscreen to adjust the rear climate
settings.
•Touch +or –to adjust the temperature.
•To adjust fan speed, touch +or –next to the fan icon.
•Touch Rear again to close the rear controls. Closing the rear climate
control functions does not affect their current settings.
E. Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air
and recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air currently in
the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time
needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce
unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented
from turning on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce risk
of fogging.
F. MAX A/C: Touch the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air
flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically
turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
G. A/C: Touch the button to switch the air conditioning compressor on
or off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions, the air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even after you switch off the air conditioning with
the A/C button.
H. AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the
desired temperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts
fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside
air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the
desired temperature. You can also use the AUTO button to switch off
dual zone operation by touching and holding the button for more than
two seconds.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 499
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
I. Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See
Heated windows and mirrors in the Climate Control chapter.
J. Defrost: Touch the button to distribute air to the windshield vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to instrument panel and footwell vents
turn off. You can use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a
thin covering of ice.
K. Manual controls: Touch these buttons to switch airflow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. The system can
distribute air through any combination of these vents.
L. Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you
may have the following features:
•Touch the +or –to increase or decrease the air temperature on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
•Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if
equipped).
•Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the
climate-controlled seat off and on (if equipped).
•Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch
and hold MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.
•If your vehicle is equipped with a heated steering wheel, touch the
heated steering wheel icon to warm the steering wheel.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a wood-trimmed steering wheel, it
does not heat between the 10 o’clock and 2 o’clock positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available at the main menu
level of a voice session. For example, press the voice button
and after the prompt, “Say a command”; say any of the
following commands:
Climate control voice commands
“Climate automatic”
“Climate my temperature”
“Climate off”
“Climate on”
“Climate temperature <15.5–29.5> degrees”
“Climate temperature <60–85> degrees”
“Help”
500 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
There are additional climate control commands but in order to access
them, you have to say “Climate” first, then when the system is ready to
listen, you may say any of the following commands:
Additional climate control voice commands
“Automatic” “Panel on”
“A/C off” “Rear defrost off”
“A/C on” “Rear defrost on”
“Defrost off” “Recirc off”
“Defrost on” “Recirc on”
“Dual off” “Temperature”
*
“Fan decrease” “Temperature <15.5–29.5>
degrees”
“Fan increase” “Temperature <60–85> degrees”
“Floor on” “Temperature decrease”
“Max A/C off” “Temperature high”
“Max A/C on” “Temperature increase”
“My temp” “Temperature low”
“Off” “Windshield floor on”
“On” “Help”
“Panel floor on”
*
If you have said “Temperature”, you can say any of the commands in the
following “Temperature” chart.
“TEMPERATURE”
“High”
“Low”
“<15.5–29.5> degrees”
“<60–85> degrees”
“Help”
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 501
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the SD card slot to operate the
navigation system. If you need a replacement SD card, see your
authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To remove the SD card, just
push the card in and release it. Do not attempt to pull the card out to
remove it; this could cause damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two main features, destination
mode and map mode.
To set a destination, press the green corner of your touchscreen, then
Dest when it appears. See Setting a destination later in this chapter.
To view the navigation map and your vehicle’s current location, touch the
green bar in the upper right hand corner of the touchscreen, or, press
Dest >Map. See Map mode later in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your touchscreen, then Dest when it appears.
Choose any of the following:
Destination selections
My Home Street Address
Favorites Intersection
Previous Destinations City Center
Point of Interest Map
Emergency Edit Route Cancel Route
1. Enter the necessary information into the highlighted text fields (in
any order). For address destination entry, Go! appears once you
enter all the necessary information. Pressing Go! makes the address
location appear on the map. If you choose Previous Destination,
the last 20 destinations you have selected appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your destination. You can also
choose to set this as a waypoint (have the system route to this point
on the way to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. The
system considers any Avoid Areas selections in its route calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different types of routes, and then select
Start Route.
•Fastest Route: Uses the fastest moving roads possible.
•Shortest Route: Uses the shortest distance possible.
•Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient route.
502 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you.
Select Route Prefs to set route preferences like avoiding freeways,
tollroads, ferries and car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes. (High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes. People who ride in buses, vanpools
or carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road and you do not press the
Start Route button, the system defaults to the Fastest Route option
and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon that
appears in the upper right navigation corner (green bar) if you want the
system to repeat route guidance information. When the system repeats
the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next
guidance instruction, since it detects when the vehicle is moving.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Your system offers a variety of points of interest categories.
Main categories
Food/Drink & Dining Automotive
Travel & Transportation Shopping
Financial Entertainment & Arts
Emergency Recreation & Sports
Community Government
Health & Medicine Domestic Services
Within these main categories, there are subcategories which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Automobile Dealership
Government Office
Public Transit
Education
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 503
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
To expand these listings, press the +in front of the point of interest
listing.
When programming a point of interest destination, the system allows you
to sort the resulting lists alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
Pressing the Search Areas button allows you to search for points of
interest nearby, near a city or state or near a destination, if a route is
active.
Pressing the Search By Name button allows you to directly enter the
point of interest name into the system by using the keyboard.
cityseekr (If Available)
Note: cityseekr point of interest information is limited to approximately
912 cities (881 in the United States, 20 in Canada and 11 in Mexico).
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of
interest, the location and information
appear, such as address and phone
number. If cityseekr lists the point of
interest, more information is available, such as a brief description, hotel
check-in and checkout times or restaurant hours.
Press More Information for a longer review, a list of services and
facilities, the average room or meal price as well as the website link.
This screen displays either a facility photo (if available) or point of
interest icons, such as:
Hotel
Coffeehouse
504 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Food & Drink
Nightlife
Attraction
This icon appears when your selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing more information for hotels, cityseekr also tells
you if the hotel has certain services and facilities using icons.
Hotel services and facilities
Restaurant 24 Hr Room Service
Business Center Fitness Center
Handicap Facilities Internet Access
Laundry Pool
Refrigerator Wi-Fi
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating,
average cost, review, handicap access, hours of operation, and website
address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide information, such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and check-out times, hotel service icons and
website address.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 505
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your route.
Press the Settings icon > Settings >Navigation.
Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs displays your vehicle’s previously traveled route with
white dots. Turn this feature ON or OFF.
Turn List Format allows you to choose to have the system display your
turn list Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Parking POI Notification sets the automatic parking points of interest
notification. Turn this feature ON or OFF. When parking points of
interest notification is on, the icons display on the map when you get
close to your destination. This may not be very useful in dense areas,
and may clutter the map when other points of interest display.
Route Preferences
Preferred Route allows you to choose to have the system display the
Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route first. If you set Always
Use Preferred Route to Yes, the system uses the selected route type
to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates one route based on the
preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low, medium or high cost for
the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time
allotment is for the route.
Avoid features allows you to choose to have the system avoid freeways,
toll roads, ferries and car trains when planning your route. Turn these
features ON or OFF.
Use HOV Lanes allows you to choose to have the system use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes, if available, when planning your route.
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts allows you to choose to have the system use Voice
& Tones or Tone Only on your programmed route.
Auto - Fill State/Province allows you have the system automatically fill
in the state and province based on the information already entered into
the system. Turn this feature ON or OFF.
506 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Traffic Preferences
Avoid Traffic Problems allows you to choose how you want the system
to handle traffic problems along your route.
•Automatic: Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic incidents
that develop and impact the current route. The system does not
provide a traffic alert notification.
•Manual: Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification
for traffic incidents along the planned route. You have a choice to
accept or ignore the notification before making the route deviation.
Traffic Alert Notification allows you to choose have the system
display traffic alert notifications.
Other traffic alert features allows you to turn on certain, or all, traffic
icons on the map such as road work, incident, accidents and closed
roads. Scroll down to view all the different types of alerts. Turn these
features ON or OFF.
Avoid Areas
Avoid Areas allows you to choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you.
Press Add to program an entry. Once you make a selection, the system
tries to avoid the area(s) if possible for all routes. To delete a selection,
choose the listing on the screen. When the screen changes to Avoid
Areas Edit, you can press Delete at the bottom right of the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area of the touchscreen to view
map mode. Map mode shows advanced viewing comprised of both 2D
city maps as well as 3D landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of buildings, visible land use and
land elements and detailed railway infrastructure for the most essential
cities around the globe. These maps also contain features, such as town
blocks, building footprints, and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects that are typically
recognizable and have a certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks appear
in 3D map mode only. Coverage varies, and improves with updated map
releases.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 507
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Change the appearance of the map
display by repeatedly pressing the
arrow button in the upper left
corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes:
Heading up, North up, and 3D.
Heading up (2D map)
always shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen. This view is available for map
scales up to 2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The system remembers this
setting for larger map scales, but shows the map in North up only.
If the scale returns below this level, the system restores Heading up.
North up (2D map) always shows the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
3D map mode
provides an elevated perspective of the map. This
viewing angle can be adjusted and the map can be rotated 180
degrees by touching the map twice, and then dragging your finger
along the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.
View switches between full map, street list and exit view in route
guidance.
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows direct access to navigation
settings, View/Edit Route, Sirius Travel Link, Guidance Mute and Cancel
Route.
Press the speaker button on the map to mute route guidance.
When the light on the button illuminates, the feature is on. The
speaker button appears on the map only when route guidance
is active.
Re-center the map by pressing this icon whenever you scroll
the map away from your vehicle’s current location.
508 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode, then select the +or -zoom
button to bring up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the touchscreen.
When you press Auto, Auto Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map scale. The map zoom level
then synchronizes with vehicle speed. The slower your vehicle is
traveling, the farther in the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle is
traveling, the farther the map zooms out. To turn the feature off, just
press the +or -button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by swiping your finger across the
shaded bar with the arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons appears when a route is active
and displays the distance and time to your destination. If the button is
pressed, a pop up appears with the destination listed (and waypoint if
applicable) along with mileage and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time to reach your destination or
your estimated arrival time.
Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current location of your vehicle. It
stays in the center of the map display, except when in scroll
mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the fixed icon is in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor
is in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by
any method other than the map. You can select from any of the
22 icons available. You can use each icon more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot change this icon.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons indicate locations of any point
of interest categories you choose to display on the map. You can
choose to display three point of interest categories on the map at
one time.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 509
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.
Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn on
the planned route.
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access more
features.
Set as Dest
Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. You may scroll the map by pressing your index finger on the
map display. When you reach the desired location, simply let go and then
touch Set as Dest.
Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites
Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites.
POI Icons
Touch this button to select icons to display on the map. You can select
up to three icons to display on the map at the same time. Turn these ON
or OFF.
Cancel Route
Touch this button to cancel the active route.
510 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
View/Edit Route
Access these features when a route is active:
•View Route
•Edit Destination/Waypoints
•Edit Turn List
•Detour
•Edit Route Preferences
•Edit Traffic Preferences
•Cancel Route.
Nokia is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you
find map data errors, you may report them directly to Nokia by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Nokia evaluates all reported map errors
and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-4NAVTEQ (1-866-462-8837) (in Mexico, call
01-800-557-5539) or going to www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. After the tone, say any of the following
commands:
Navigation system voice commands
“Cancel next waypoint”
1
“Navigation”
3
“Cancel route”
1
“Navigation voice volume
decrease”
1
“Destination”
2
“Navigation voice volume
increase”
1
“Destination <nametag>” “Repeat instruction”
“Destination <POI category>” “Show 3D”
“Destination favorites” “Show heading up”
“Destination home” “Show map”
“Destination intersection” “Show north up”
“Destination nearest
<POI category>”
“Show route”
1
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 511
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Navigation system voice commands
“Destination nearest POI” “Show turn list”
1
“Destination play nametags” “Voice guidance off”
“Destination POI” “Voice guidance on”
“Destination POI category” “Where am I?”
“Destination previous destination” “Zoom in”
“Destination street address” “Zoom out”
“Detour”
1
“Help”
1
This command is only available when a navigation route is active.
2
If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
3
If you have said the command, “Navigation”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Navigation chart.
“DESTINATION”
“<nametag>”
“<POI category>”
“Favorites”
“Home”
“Intersection”
“Nearest <POI category>”
“Nearest POI”
“Play nametags”
“POI category”
“Previous destination”
“Street address”
“Help”
“NAVIGATION”
“Destination”
*
“Zoom city”
“Zoom country”
“Zoom in minimum”
“Zoom out maximum”
“Zoom province”
512 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
“NAVIGATION”
“Zoom state”
“Zoom street”
“Zoom to <distance>”
“Help”
*
If you have said, “Destination”, you may say any of the commands in the
Destination chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either “Navigation destination street address” or
“Destination street address”, the system asks you to say the full address.
The system displays an example on-screen. You can then speak the
address naturally, such as “One two three four Main Street, Anytown”.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see
the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for
more information.
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
There is
excessive
background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person but
they cannot hear
me.
Possible phone
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device, removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 513
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
•Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the website.
The system says
Phonebook
Downloaded but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Limitations on
your phone’s
capability.
•Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
•If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
•Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated
with the missing contact.
514 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Phone issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
phone to SYNC.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
•Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
•Update your device’s software
firmware.
•Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is
not working on
SYNC.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•Possible phone
malfunction.
•Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 515
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
USB and media issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I am having
trouble connecting
my device.
Possible device
malfunction.
•Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
•Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
•Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
•Make sure that the device does
not have an auto-install program
or active security settings.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I turn
on the car.
This is a device
limitation.
Make sure you are not leaving the
device in your vehicle during very
hot or cold temperatures.
Bluetooth audio
does not stream.
•Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
•The device is
not connected.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that you
have pressed play on your device.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
•Your music files
may not contain
the proper artist,
song title, album
or genre
information, OR
•The file may be
corrupted, OR
•The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
•Make sure that all song details
are populated.
•Some devices require you to
change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
516 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic, Directions and
Information) issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
I received a text
that the Vehicle
Health Report is
not activated.
•Your account
may not be
activated on the
website, OR
•You may have
the wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
•This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
•Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
I am unable to
retrieve the report
on the website, or
I receive a system
error.
The preferred
dealer information
did not load
correctly.
When you register your account,
you must list a preferred dealer. If
one is already listed, try selecting
another dealer and logging out.
Log back in and change it back to
your preferred dealer and retrieve
the report.
I am unable to
submit a report.
•This could be
due to your
phone’s
compatibility, OR
•Bad signal
strength, OR
•Your phone may
not be activated
on the website.
•Update your mobile number in
your account on the website.
•Make sure you have full signal
strength and that your Bluetooth
volume level has been turned up.
•Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
I heard a
commercial when I
tried to use
Traffic, Directions
and Information.
•The phone in
use is not
activated, OR
•Your phone has
ID blocker active.
•This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
•Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes
you by your phone number.
•Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same one
that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 517
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand what
I am saying.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may be
speaking too soon
or at the wrong
time.
•Review the Phone voice
commands and the Media voice
commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
•Be aware that the microphone
for SYNC is either in your rear
view mirror or in the headliner
just above the windshield.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song or
artist.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
•The system
may not be
reading the name
the same way you
are saying it.
•Review the media voice
commands at the beginning of
the media section.
•Say the song or artist exactly
as listed. If you say, “Play Artist
Prince”, the system does not
play music by Prince and the
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation.
•Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
“California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles”.
•If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
•Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
518 MyFord Touch® (If Equipped)
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Voice command issues
Issue Possible
cause(s)
Possible solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
•You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
•You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
•Contacts in
your phonebook
may be very short
and similar, or
they may contain
special
characters, OR
•Your
phonebook
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.
•Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
the phone section.
•Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as listed. For
example, if a contact is saved as
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe
Wilson”.
•The system works better if
you list full names, such as “Joe
Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
•Do not use special characters
such as 123 or ICE, as the
system does not recognize them.
•If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
requires you to say, “Call
J-A-K-E”.
MyFord Touch System Reset
The MyFord Touch system has System Reset feature that can be
performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is
intended to restore functionality and will not erase any information
previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook,
call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System
Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and
holding the Radio Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the
screen will go black. Allow a 1-2 minutes for the system reset to
complete. You may then resume using the SYNC system.
MyFord Touch® (If Equipped) 519
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC® End User License Agreement (EULA)
•You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software
licensed by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as
well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic
documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THRID PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
•The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as
⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
•You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
520 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
•Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
•Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
•Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
•Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
•SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
•Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
•Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
Appendices 521
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
•Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to
provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
•Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
•Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
522 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
•Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third
party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
•Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it
in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
Appendices 523
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S.
and other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THRID PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
•THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
524 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
End user notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
Appendices 525
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
General Operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while
you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to
access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has
been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
526 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or
illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the
Telenav Software. Your use of the Telenav Software indicates that
you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these
terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch,
or otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the agreement (“Agreement”)
between you and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect to the Telenav
Software (including upgrades, modifications, or additions thereto)
(collectively “Telenav Software”). All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and contractors, and any other entity
on whose behalf you accept these terms and conditions, all of whom shall
also be bound by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your account
information, as well as other payment and personal information provided by
you to Telenav (directly or through the use of the Telenav Software, is
subject to Telenav’s privacy policy located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement
and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the Telenav Software may
pose a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that
Appendices 527
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
otherwise require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to
comply with the following when using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal
judgment while driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the Telenav
Software instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places
you in an unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider
to be unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input
destinations, or otherwise manipulate the Telenav Software, unless your
vehicle is stationary and parked; (d) do not use the Telenav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful
purposes, or in any manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e)
arrange all GPS and wireless devices and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in your vehicle so that they will not
interfere with your driving and will not prevent the operation of any
safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the
Telenav Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your
failure to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the Telenav Software, to provide Telenav
with true, accurate, current, and complete information about yourself,
and (b) to inform Telenav promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, Telenav
hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software license), without the right to sublicense,
to use the Telenav Software (in object code form only) in order to access
and use the Telenav Software. This license shall terminate upon any
termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use
the Telenav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer,
decompile, disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the
Telenav Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source
code, audio library or structure of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c) remove from the Telenav
Software, or alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade
528 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
names, logos, patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings;
(d) distribute, sublicense or otherwise transfer the Telenav Software to
others, except as part of your permanent transfer of the Telenav
Software; or (e) use the Telenav Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or proprietary rights, rights of publicity
or privacy or other rights of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute,
ordinance or regulation, including but not limited to laws and regulations
related to spamming, privacy, consumer and child protection, obscenity
or defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
access by third parties to the Telenav Software without advanced written
permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will Telenav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of
the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or
anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the Telenav
Software. Telenav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the Telenav Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible
for the entire risk arising out of your use of the Telenav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the Telenav
Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps
or functionality of the Telenav Software are not intended to support such
high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER
STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY
Appendices 529
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR
ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR
GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating
to this Agreement or the Telenav Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered
by the American Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of
the American Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award
rendered by the arbitrator may be entered by any court having
jurisdiction. Note that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both
Telenav and you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your
permanent transfer of the Telenav Software, and expressly conditioned
upon the new user of the Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by the
530 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result
in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to Telenav,
in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of
the Telenav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav may assign
this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between Telenav
and you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement,
Telenav retains all right, title and interest in and to the Telenav Software,
including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No
licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this
Agreement are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by
implication, statute, inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and Telenav and
its suppliers and licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3 By using the Telenav Software, you consent to receive from Telenav
all communications, including notices, agreements, legally required
disclosures or other information in connection with the Telenav Software
(collectively, “Notices”) electronically. Telenav may provide such Notices
by posting them on Telenav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to
your wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive
Notices electronically, you must discontinue your use of the Telenav
Software.
8.4 Telenav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall
not affect that party’s right to require performance at any time
thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of
the provision itself.
8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will
be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining
provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference
only, will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be
referred to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the words “include” and
“including,” and variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of
limitation, but rather will be deemed to be followed by the words
“without limitation”.
Appendices 531
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to
Telenav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your
use of the Telenav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to
comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which
are applicable to Telenav’s third party vendor licensors:
End User License Agreement For Distribution By HERE For North
America/APAC
END USER TERMS
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this
package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use,
resell or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this
agreement, and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must
contact your retailer or HERE North America, LLC (as defined below)
within thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price.
To contact HERE, please visit www.here.com.
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
(this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to
by you, on the one hand, and HERE and its licensors (including their
licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. For purposes of these terms,
“HERE” shall mean (a) HERE North America, LLC with respect to Data
for the Americas and/or the Asia Pacific region and (b) HERE Europe
B.V. for Data for Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa.
The Data includes certain information and related content provided
under license to HERE from third parties and is subject to the applicable
supplier terms and copyright notices set forth at the following URL:
http://corporate.navteq.com/supplier_terms.html.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this Data
is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal, noncommercial
purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar
purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws.
532 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may
transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis
if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End-User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data
in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the
original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original
packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by HERE in a separate written agreement,
and without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned
on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a)
use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication
with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital -assistants or PDAs.
This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circum-stances, sources used and the nature of
collecting comprehensive geographic Data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to use it
at your own risk. HERE and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness
for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion
may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU
IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE
Appendices 533
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF
THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS
OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS
DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the
Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with
all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security
of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export
laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between HERE (and its licensors, including their licensors
and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and HERE agree that if any portion of this agreement
is found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois (for Data for the Americas and/or the
Asia Pacific region) or The Netherlands (for Data for Europe, the Middle
East and Africa), without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. For any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data
(“Claims”), you agree to submit to the personal jurisdiction of (a) the
State of Illinois for Claims related to Data for the Americas and/or the
Asia Pacific region provided to you hereunder, and (b) The Netherlands
for Data for Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa provided to you
hereunder.
534 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying
rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States
government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End[not ]
User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the End User License Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
娀1987-2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify
HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 娀2013 JiWire.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
Appendices 535
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign,
copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any
third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively,
reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you provide, including any
copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each company’s own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND
THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.” NEITHER
GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
536 Appendices
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE
COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT
EITHER GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE
FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED
TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS
FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE
RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER.
娀Gracenote 2007
Vehicle with SYNC only
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Vehicle with SYNC and MyFord Touch or MyLincoln Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio
certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Appendices 537
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or trade it.
Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle based
upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle serviced
at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is to
maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled maintenance performed and
to make sure that the materials used meet the specifications identified in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter of this owner’s manual.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage
on parts affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and Ford-authorized branded
re-manufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed our
specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited miles (kilometers) parts and labor limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they may not meet our specifications
and depending on the part, it could affect emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or body shops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
538 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor (IOLM)
system which displays a message in the information display at the proper
oil change service interval; this interval may be up to one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers). When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the information display, it is time
for an oil change; the oil change must be done within two weeks or
500 miles (800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED message appearing. The Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
must be reset after each oil change; see the Information Displays
chapter.
If your information display is prematurely reset or becomes inoperative,
you should perform the oil change interval at six months or 5000 miles
(8000 kilometers) from your last oil change. Never exceed one year or
10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex,
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
the owner manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual. Additional
chemicals or additives not approved by Ford Motor Company are not
recommended as part of normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Scheduled Maintenance 539
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as
necessary.
540 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation
Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary Tires (including spare) for wear and
proper pressure
**
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power
steering (if equipped) and window washer.
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire
sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will
know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that
may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle
inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
Scheduled Maintenance 541
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
542 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor®
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor that
determines when the engine oil needs to be changed based on how your
vehicle is used. By using several important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your vehicle and reduce
environmental waste at the same time. This means you won’t have to
remember to change the oil on a mileage-based schedule; the vehicle lets
you know when an oil change is due by displaying ENGINE OIL
CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE REQUIRED in the information display.
The following table is intended to provide examples of vehicle use and
its impact on engine oil change intervals; it is provided as a guideline
only. Actual engine oil change intervals depend on several factors and
generally decrease with severity of use.
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Interval Vehicle use and examples
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal
– Normal commuting with highway driving
– No, or moderate, load or towing
– Flat to moderately hilly roads
– No extended idling
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Severe
– Moderate to heavy load or towing
– Mountainous or off-road conditions
– Extended idling
– Extended hot or cold operation
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Extreme
– Maximum load or towing
– Extreme hot or cold operation
Scheduled Maintenance 543
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Normal scheduled maintenance
*
At every oil change
interval as indicated by
the information display
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure
tread depth.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level (if
equipped with dipstick). Consult dealer for
requirements.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheel
drive vehicles).
Inspect half-shaft boots (if equipped).
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between
service intervals.
**
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
544 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Other maintenance items
1
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace climate-controlled (heated and
cooled) seat filter (if equipped).
Replace engine air filter.
At 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Change engine coolant.
2
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive
vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive
vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).
1
These maintenance items can be performed within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of the last oil change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers),
then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
Scheduled Maintenance 545
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
546 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 547
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
548 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following tables when specified or
within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED
message appearing in the information display.
Example #1: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers); perform the 30000 mile (48000
kilometer) automatic transmission fluid replacement.
Example #2: The OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message has not come on,
but the odometer reads 30000 miles (48000 kilometers); perform the
engine air filter replacement. (i.e., Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset
at 25000 miles [40000 kilometers].)
Towing a trailer or using a camper or car-top carrier
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
the information display and perform services
listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance
chart.
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints.
See axle maintenance items under
Exceptions.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four–wheel drive
vehicles).
Scheduled Maintenance 549
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in
heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or
livery)
As required Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
the information display and perform services
listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance
chart.
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Change transfer case fluid (Four–wheel drive
vehicles).
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions such as unpaved or
dusty roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four–wheel drive
vehicles).
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
550 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Off-road operation
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease
seals if non-sealed bearings are used (2WD
vehicles).
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (Four–wheel drive
vehicles).
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Scheduled Maintenance 551
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
552 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 553
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should
be changed every 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) or three months,
whichever comes first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles (see Technical specifications in the Capacities
and Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100000 miles (160000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water.
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change
service interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter replacement: Engine air filter life is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air
filter.
554 Scheduled Maintenance
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change Six years or 100000 miles (160000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every three years or 50000 miles (80000 km)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: HOURS:
DATE :MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 555
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
911 Assist™ ......................405, 482
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................212
Accessing and using your
USB port ....................................461
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............394
Accessing your calendar ..........481
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................418
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................396
Accessory delay ..........................98
Active call menu options .........394
Adding (pairing) a phone ........468
Advanced menu
options ...............................403, 424
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................403
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................47
and child safety seats ..............48
description ................................47
disposal ......................................53
driver airbag ..............................47
passenger airbag .......................47
side airbag ...........................47–48
Air cleaner filter .......303–304, 360
Air conditioning ................136, 138
manual heating and air
conditioning system .......136, 138
Air filter .............................304, 360
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................203
Ambient mood/lighting .............488
Ambulance packages ..................15
AM/FM .......................................449
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................294
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................212
Anti-theft system ..................79, 82
arming the system ..............79, 82
disarming a triggered
system .......................................82
AppLink™ .................................413
Ashtray(s) .................................176
Audio system
Single CD ........................370, 375
Audio system
(see Radio) ........................370, 375
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................194
fluid, adding ............................298
fluid, checking ........................298
fluid, refill capacities ..............356
fluid, specification ..................356
Selectshift (SST) ....................197
Auxiliary Input Jack .................458
Auxiliary input jack
(Line in) ....................................383
Auxiliary powerpoint ................173
A/V inputs ..........................385, 465
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........356
refill capacities ........................356
556 Index
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
B
Battery .......................................300
acid, treating emergencies .....300
jumping a disabled battery ....271
maintenance-free ....................300
replacement, specifications ...360
servicing ..................................300
Blind Spot Information
System .......................................230
Booster seats ...............................30
Brakes ........................................212
anti-lock ...................................212
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................212
brake warning light ................212
fluid, checking and adding ....299
fluid, refill capacities ..............356
fluid, specifications .................356
lubricant specifications ..........356
parking ....................................213
shift interlock ..................199–200
trailer ...............................254–255
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....356
Cargo management system ......244
CD ......................................370, 375
CD player ..........................368, 460
CD voice commands .................461
Cell phone use ............................16
Changing a tire .........................347
Changing the air filter ..............304
Child safety seats
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................38
LATCH .......................................23
Child safety seats -
booster seats ...............................30
Cleaning the touchscreen ........440
Cleaning your vehicle ...............313
engine compartment ..............315
instrument panel ....................318
interior .....................................317
plastic parts ............................314
washing ....................................313
waxing .....................................315
wheels ......................................320
wiper blades ............................316
Climate control
(see Air conditioning or
Heating) .............................136, 138
Climate voice commands .........500
Clock ..................................370, 486
Console
overhead ..........................101, 176
Controls
power seat ...............................153
Coolant ......................................294
checking and adding ..............294
refill capacities ........................356
specifications ..........................356
Cross Traffic Alert ....................230
Cruise control ...........................228
Customer Assistance ................268
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................365
Getting roadside assistance ...268
Getting the service you
need .........................................274
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................280
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................278
Index 557
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
D
Defrost .......................136, 138, 140
rear window ............................146
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................298
engine oil .................................293
Display settings .........................487
Driving under special
conditions ..................202, 208–209
sand .........................................208
snow and ice ...........................210
through water .................209, 266
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) .........................140
E
Electronic stability control ......217
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................271
running out of fuel .................186
Emission control system ..........191
End user license agreement ....520
Engine ........................................355
cleaning ...................................315
coolant .....................................294
fail-safe cooling .......................297
idle speed control ...................300
lubrication specifications .......356
refill capacities ........................356
service points ..........................292
Engine block heater .................182
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............293
dipstick ....................................293
filter, specifications ................360
refill capacities ........................356
specifications ..........................356
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................182
F
Fail safe cooling ........................297
Fleet MyKey programming ........62
Floor mats .................................266
Fluid capacities .........................356
Forward and reverse sensing
system ........................................222
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......203
description ..............................204
driving off road .......................206
indicator light .........................203
Fuel
cap ...........................................189
capacity ...................................356
choosing the right fuel ...........185
filler funnel .............................186
filling your vehicle with fuel ..189
filter, specifications ................299
fuel pump shut-off ..................270
octane rating ...................186, 355
quality ......................................185
running out of fuel .................186
safety information relating
to automotive fuels ................184
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .........................................185
Fuses ..................................282, 286
G
Garage door opener ..................168
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............189
Gauges ...............................104, 106
558 Index
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
H
Hazard flashers .........................270
HD Radio™ ...............................450
Headlamps
aiming ......................................306
autolamp system .................93–94
bulb specifications ..................312
checking alignment ................306
flash to pass ..............................92
high beam .................................92
replacing bulbs .......................308
Head restraints .........................149
Heated steering wheel ..............498
Heating ......................136, 138, 140
Help ............................................497
Hill descent mode .....................219
Hill start assist ..........................213
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................168
Hood ..........................................291
How to use voice
commands .................................444
I
Ignition ...............................178, 355
Illuminated visor mirror ...........102
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................193
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................318
cluster ......................................107
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................94
Intelligent Access Key ................56
J
Jack ............................................347
positioning ...............................347
storage .....................................347
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....394
Jump-starting your vehicle ......271
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................71
keypad .......................................77
locking and unlocking doors ....78
programming entry code .........77
Keys .......................................55, 80
positions of the ignition .........178
L
Lamps
autolamp system .................93–94
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................312
headlamps, flash to pass ..........92
instrument panel, dimming .....94
interior lamps ...........................95
replacing bulbs ...............308, 311
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................95
LATCH anchors ...........................23
Liftgate ..................................73–74
Lights, warning and indicator ..107
Listening to music ....................447
Loading instructions .................244
Load limits .................................238
Index 559
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
Locks
autolock .....................................71
childproof ..................................34
doors ..........................................69
Lubricant specifications ...........356
Lug nuts ....................................354
M
Making and receiving calls .......469
MAP DVD - Loading and
Unloading ..................................469
Map icons ..................................509
Map mode ..................................507
Map preferences .......................506
Map updates ..............................511
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................422
Message center
warning messages ...................125
Mirrors .................................98, 100
fold away ...................................98
programmable memory ............58
side view mirrors (power) .......98
signal .......................................100
Moon roof ..................................102
Motorcraft® parts .............313, 360
MyFord Touch™ system ..........436
MyKey ..........................................62
N
Navigation features ...................502
Navigation voice commands ....511
Notifications ..............................481
O
Octane rating ............................186
P
Pairing other phones ........392, 468
Pairing your phone ...................468
Pairing your phone for the
first time ............................391, 468
Parental MyKey programming ...62
Parking brake ............................213
Parts
(see Motorcraft® parts) ..........360
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................402
Phone redial ..............................396
Phone settings ..................472, 494
Phone voice commands ............473
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist,
tracks, similar) ..........................420
POI categories ...........................503
Point of Interest (POI) .............503
Power deployable running
boards ........................................246
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) .......................282, 286
Power door locks ........................69
Power liftgate ..............................74
Power mirrors .............................98
Powerpoint ................................173
Power steering ..........................235
fluid, checking and adding ....299
560 Index
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
fluid, refill capacity ................356
fluid, specifications .................356
Power Windows ...........................97
Privacy information ..........388, 442
Push button start system .........178
Putting a call on/off hold .........394
Q
Quick touch buttons .................510
R
Radio ..................................370, 375
AM/FM .....................................449
Single CD ........................370, 375
Radio reception .........................368
Radio voice commands .............454
Rear heated seats .....................165
Rear view camera
display ................................224, 489
Rear window
defroster ....................136, 138, 140
Receiving a text
message .............................398, 471
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints
for children ..................................19
Relays ........................................282
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................72
locking/unlocking doors ...........69
replacing the batteries .............56
Remote start climate
operation ...................................146
Roadside assistance ..................268
Roll stability control .................217
Roof rack ...................................237
Route preferences ....................506
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............43
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............37
Safety defects, reporting ..........281
Safety information ............387, 440
Safety restraints ..............37–38, 40
Belt-Minder® ............................41
extension assembly ..................39
for adults .............................37–38
for children ...............................19
safety belt maintenance ...........43
seat belt maintenance ..............43
warning light and chime ..........41
Safety restraints -
LATCH anchors ...........................23
Safety seats for children ............19
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................362
Satellite Radio ...................370, 455
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............543
SD card ......................385, 461, 502
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............37
Seats
child safety seats ......................19
cleaning ...................................319
climate control ........................157
filter .........................................360
front seats ...............................152
heated ......................................165
memory seat .....................58, 155
Index 561
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ..........................................77
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................79
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........418
Sending new text messages .....471
Setting a destination ................502
Setting a destination by
voice ...........................................502
Settings ......................................486
Setting the clock ...............370, 486
Side air curtain ...........................50
Side-curtain airbags system .......50
SIRIUS® satellite radio ....370, 455
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................457
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................478
SIRIUS Travel Link voice
commands .................................480
Snowplowing ...............................15
SOS Post Crash Alert .................46
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................355, 360
Special notice
ambulance conversions ............15
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................356
Stability system .........................217
Starting your vehicle ................179
jump starting ..........................271
push button start system .......178
Steering wheel ............................83
controls ......................................85
tilting .........................................83
Sun visor ....................................102
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................47
Supported media file types ......464
Supported player, media
formats and metadata
information ................................464
Suspension ................................236
SYNC® AppLink™ ...................413
SYNC® customer
support ..............................387, 440
SYNC® Services ................410, 474
System settings .........................489
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) ..............136,
138, 140, 498
Text messaging .................398, 470
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....398, 400
Third-row power fold seat .......167
Tilt steering wheel ......................83
Tires ...........................326–327, 347
alignment ................................340
care ..........................................326
changing ..........................347, 349
checking the pressure ............336
inflating ...................................334
label .........................................333
replacing ..................................338
rotating ....................................341
safety practices .......................340
sidewall information ...............329
snow tires and chains ............341
spare tire .................................347
terminology .............................328
562 Index
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)
tire grades ...............................327
treadwear ........................327, 336
Touchscreen features
(climate) ....................................498
Towing ...............................248, 261
recreational towing .................262
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ..............255
trailer towing ..........................248
wrecker ....................................261
Traction control ........................215
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................410
Traffic preferences ...................506
Trailer Brake
Controller-Integrated ................255
Trailer sway control ..................249
Transmission
brake-shift interlock
(BSI) ................................199–200
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................298
fluid, refill capacities ..............356
lubricant specifications ..........356
Turn signal ..................................95
U
USB port ....................384–385, 461
Using privacy mode ..................394
V
Vehicle health report ........408, 484
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................361
Vehicle loading ..........................238
Ventilating your vehicle ...........182
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................415
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................392
Voice recognition ......................443
W
Warning lights
(see Lights) ...............................107
Washer fluid ......................299–300
Water, Driving through .............266
Windows
power .........................................97
rear wiper/washer .....................91
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................90
checking and adding
fluid ..................................299–300
replacing wiper blades ...........302
Wrecker towing .........................261
Index 563
2015 Expedition (exd)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing, July 2014
USA (fus)

Navigation menu